PR25570, ld duplicate "warning: changing start of section"
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
b3adc24a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
b3adc24a 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
b3adc24a 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
41f37a6f 858copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1914e264
AM
1439within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440platforms which support shared libraries.
252b5132 1441
40b36307
L
1442@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1445symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307 1446This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1914e264 1447libraries.
40b36307 1448
55255dae
L
1449@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457which support shared libraries.
1458
1459The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
40b36307
L
1462@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463@item --dynamic-list-data
1464Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
0b8a70d9
L
1471@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
252b5132
RH
1475@kindex --check-sections
1476@kindex --no-check-sections
1477@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1478@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1479Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1480been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1481perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1484restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1485Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487option.
252b5132 1488
ddbb8a31
NC
1489@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1493This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1494by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1495command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1496output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1497input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1498specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1499follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1501
1502This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1503libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1509symbols.
1510
252b5132
RH
1511@cindex cross reference table
1512@kindex --cref
1513@item --cref
1514Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1522definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524symbol are listed.
252b5132 1525
4818e05f
AM
1526@cindex common allocation
1527@kindex --no-define-common
1528@item --no-define-common
1529This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
7bdf4127
AB
1544@cindex group allocation in linker script
1545@cindex section groups
1546@cindex COMDAT
1547@kindex --force-group-allocation
1548@item --force-group-allocation
1549This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
252b5132 1556@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1557@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1559Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1566using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1569
1570@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1571@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1572@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1573@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1574@itemx --no-demangle
1575These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1579mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1582demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1584
1585@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1586@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1587@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588@item -I@var{file}
1589@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1590Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593doing.
1594
9b8b325a
RF
1595@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596@item --no-dynamic-linker
1597When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
a70f34c0
NC
1602@kindex --embedded-relocs
1603@item --embedded-relocs
1604This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1605that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1606is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607targets.
1608
3f0a5f17
ME
1609@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
7ce691ae 1614@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1615@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1616@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1617@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1620
252b5132
RH
1621@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622@item --force-exe-suffix
1623Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632@kindex --gc-sections
1633@kindex --no-gc-sections
1634@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1635@item --gc-sections
1636@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1637Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1638targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1639performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1640@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1643
d5465ba2
AM
1644@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1652relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1654
ac69cbc6 1655This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1656@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1657specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1660
c17d87de
NC
1661@kindex --print-gc-sections
1662@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663@cindex garbage collection
1664@item --print-gc-sections
1665@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671line.
1672
22185505 1673@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674@cindex garbage collection
1675@item --gc-keep-exported
1676When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683ELF format targets.
1684
30824704
RM
1685@kindex --print-output-format
1686@cindex output format
1687@item --print-output-format
1688Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
3604cb1f
TG
1692@kindex --print-memory-usage
1693@cindex memory usage
1694@item --print-memory-usage
1695Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701@smallexample
1702Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705@end smallexample
1706
252b5132
RH
1707@cindex help
1708@cindex usage
1709@kindex --help
1710@item --help
1711Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
ea20a7da
CC
1713@kindex --target-help
1714@item --target-help
a094d01f 1715Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1716
2509a395
SL
1717@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1719Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1720@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1721
1722@cindex memory usage
1723@kindex --no-keep-memory
1724@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1725@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1727instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1728necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1729while linking a large executable.
1730
1731@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1732@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1733@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1734@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1735@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1736Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1740libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1741
97a232d7
NC
1742The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
aa713662
L
1744@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745@kindex -z muldefs
1746@item --allow-multiple-definition
1747@itemx -z muldefs
1748Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750first definition will be used.
1751
b79e8c78 1752@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1753@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1754@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1755@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1756Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1757This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
903249d7
NC
1762The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765a shared library.
1766
1767The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770@itemize @bullet
1771@item
1772A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774resolvable at load time.
1775@item
1776There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782appropriate memset function.
1783@end itemize
b79e8c78 1784
31941635
L
1785@kindex --no-undefined-version
1786@item --no-undefined-version
1787Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789will be issued instead.
1790
3e3b46e5
PB
1791@kindex --default-symver
1792@item --default-symver
1793Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1794exported symbols.
1795
1796@kindex --default-imported-symver
1797@item --default-imported-symver
1798Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1803Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1804files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1806This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1807errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809inappropriate.
1810
fe7929ce
AM
1811@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
252b5132
RH
1816@kindex --no-whole-archive
1817@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1818Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1819archive files.
1820
1821@cindex output file after errors
1822@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823@item --noinhibit-exec
1824Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
0a9c1c8e
CD
1829@kindex -nostdlib
1830@item -nostdlib
1831Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
252b5132 1835@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1836@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1838@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1840@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1841object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1843should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849@end ifclear
1850
76359541
TP
1851@kindex --out-implib
1852@item --out-implib @var{file}
1853Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
36af4a4e
JJ
1861@kindex -pie
1862@kindex --pic-executable
1863@item -pie
1864@itemx --pic-executable
1865@cindex position independent executables
1866Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1869address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1870normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
252b5132
RH
1873@kindex -qmagic
1874@item -qmagic
1875This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877@kindex -Qy
1878@item -Qy
1879This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881@kindex --relax
1882@cindex synthesizing linker
1883@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1884@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1885@item --relax
28d5f677 1886@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1887An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1888@ifset GENERIC
1889This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890@end ifset
1891@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1892@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1893@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1894@ifset XTENSA
1895@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1897@ifset M68HC11
1898@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1900@ifset NIOSII
1901@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1903@ifset POWERPC
1904@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905@end ifset
252b5132 1906
a094d01f 1907On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1908global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1911instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1912
1913On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1916This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1918@end ifset
1919
1920@ifset GENERIC
1921On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922but ignored.
1923@end ifset
1924
28d5f677
NC
1925On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
252b5132
RH
1928@cindex retaining specified symbols
1929@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1931@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1933Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936@ifset GENERIC
1937(such as VxWorks)
1938@end ifset
1939where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940run-time memory.
1941
1942@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1949@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1950@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1951@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1952Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1953linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1954arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
c1b00498
MR
1955them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965is defined.
252b5132 1966
ff5dcc92 1967The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1968SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1969@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1973file systems.
252b5132 1974
ff5dcc92 1975For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1976followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1977the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1978@end ifset
1979
1980@ifset GENERIC
1981@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1982@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1984When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986of the input files.
1987
1988When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1991explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1992specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1993@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1994either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995appearing multiple times.
1996
e680a6b6
NC
1997The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200164-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005supported.
2006
28c309a2
NC
2007This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010runtime linker would do.
2011
252b5132 2012The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2013libraries:
d8e4137b 2014
252b5132
RH
2015@enumerate
2016@item
ff5dcc92 2017Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2018@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2019Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2020between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2021specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2022used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2023at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2024by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2025the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2026@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2027On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2028@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2029environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2030@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2031On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2032directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2033@item
a1b8d843 2034For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2035variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2036@item
ec4eb78a
L
2037For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2038@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2039libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2040@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2041@item
252b5132
RH
2042The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2043@item
d8e4137b
NC
2044For a linker for a Linux system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2045exists, the list of directories found in that file. Note: the path
2046to this file is prefixed with the @code{sysroot} value, if that is
2047defined, and then any @code{prefix} string if the linker was
2048configured with the @command{--prefix=<path>} option.
2049@item
2050For a native linker on a FreeBSD system, any directories specified by
2051the @code{_PATH_ELF_HINTS} macro defined in the @file{elf-hints.h}
2052header file.
2053@item
2054Any directories specifed by a @code{SEARCH_DIR} command in the
2055linker script being used.
252b5132
RH
2056@end enumerate
2057
2058If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2059warning and continue with the link.
2060@end ifset
2061
2062@kindex -shared
2063@kindex -Bshareable
2064@item -shared
2065@itemx -Bshareable
2066@cindex shared libraries
2067Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2068and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2069shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2070undefined symbols in the link.
2071
252b5132 2072@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2073@item --sort-common
2074@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2075@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2076This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2077ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2078sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2079eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2080between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2081specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2082
2509a395
SL
2083@kindex --sort-section=name
2084@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2085This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2086patterns in the linker script.
2087
2509a395
SL
2088@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2089@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2090This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2091patterns in the linker script.
2092
a70f34c0
NC
2093@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2094@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2095This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2096.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2097post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2098
252b5132 2099@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2100@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2101Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2102each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2103size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2104
2105@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2106@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2107Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2108output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2109This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2110certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2111cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2112that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2113support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2114input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2115more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2116many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2117
2118@kindex --stats
2119@item --stats
2120Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2121as execution time and memory usage.
2122
2509a395 2123@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2124@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2125Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2126configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2127that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2128
a70f34c0
NC
2129@kindex --task-link
2130@item --task-link
2131This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2132file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2133
252b5132
RH
2134@kindex --traditional-format
2135@cindex traditional format
2136@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2137For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2138the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2139use the traditional format instead.
2140
2141@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2142For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2143symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2144full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2145@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2146trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2147combine duplicate entries.
2148
2509a395
SL
2149@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2150@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2151Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2152address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2153times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2154line.
2155@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2156for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2157@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2158should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2159sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2160
2509a395
SL
2161@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2162@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2163@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2164@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2165@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2166@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2167@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2168Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2169@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2170
2509a395
SL
2171@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2172@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2173@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2174When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2175byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2176
9d5777a3
RM
2177@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2178@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2179@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2180When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2181the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2182text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2183
0d705e9f
AM
2184@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2185@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2186@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2187When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2188model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2189
560e09e9
NC
2190@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2191@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2192Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2193values for @samp{method}:
2194
2195@table @samp
2196@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2197Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2198
2199@item report-all
da8bce14 2200Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2201
2202@item ignore-in-object-files
2203Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2204ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2205
2206@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2207Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2208ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2209when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2210libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2211command line.
2212@end table
2213
2214The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2215by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2216
2217Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2218unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2219can change this to a warning.
2220
1715a13c
L
2221@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2222@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2223@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2224@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2225Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2226supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2227the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2228argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2229
2230@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2231@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2232@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2233Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2234used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2235about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2236is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2237see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2238use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2239symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2240@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2241
7ce691ae 2242@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2243@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2244@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2245@item --warn-common
2246Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2247a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2248but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2249you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2250Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2251warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2252
2253There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2254
2255@table @samp
2256@item int i = 1;
2257A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2258file.
2259
2260@item extern int i;
2261An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2262There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2263variable somewhere.
2264
2265@item int i;
2266A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2267variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2268The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2269single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2270size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2271a definition of the same variable.
2272@end table
2273
2274The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2275Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2276just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2277encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2278a common symbol.
2279
2280@enumerate
2281@item
2282Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2283definition for the symbol.
2284@smallexample
2285@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2286 overridden by definition
2287@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2288@end smallexample
2289
2290@item
2291Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2292the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2293except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2294@smallexample
2295@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2296 overriding common
2297@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2298@end smallexample
2299
2300@item
2301Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2302@smallexample
2303@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2304 of `@var{symbol}'
2305@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2306@end smallexample
2307
2308@item
2309Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2310@smallexample
2311@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2312 overridden by larger common
2313@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2314@end smallexample
2315
2316@item
2317Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2318the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2319encountered in a different order.
2320@smallexample
2321@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2322 overriding smaller common
2323@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2324@end smallexample
2325@end enumerate
2326
2327@kindex --warn-constructors
2328@item --warn-constructors
2329Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2330object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2331detect the use of global constructors.
2332
2333@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2334@item --warn-multiple-gp
2335Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2336This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2337Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2338section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2339of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2340base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2341base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2342bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2343large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2344values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2345option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2346
2347@kindex --warn-once
2348@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2349@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2350@item --warn-once
2351Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2352which refers to it.
2353
2354@kindex --warn-section-align
2355@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2356@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2357@item --warn-section-align
2358Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2359alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2360The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2361is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2362the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2363
8fdd7217
NC
2364@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2365@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2366Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2367
a0c402a5
L
2368@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2369@item --warn-alternate-em
2370Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2371
560e09e9
NC
2372@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2373@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2374If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2375@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2376This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2377
2378@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2379@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2380This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2381it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2382
252b5132
RH
2383@kindex --whole-archive
2384@cindex including an entire archive
2385@item --whole-archive
2386For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2387@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2388in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2389files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2390library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2391library. This option may be used more than once.
2392
7ec229ce 2393Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2394about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2395Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2396list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2397your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2398
2509a395
SL
2399@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2400@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2401Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2402@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2403undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2404@var{symbol}.
2405
2406This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2407wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2408wishes to call the system function, it should call
2409@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2410
2411Here is a trivial example:
2412
2413@smallexample
2414void *
cc2f008e 2415__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2416@{
cc2f008e 2417 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2418 return __real_malloc (c);
2419@}
2420@end smallexample
2421
ff5dcc92 2422If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2423all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2424instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2425call the real @code{malloc} function.
2426
2427You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2428links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2429you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2430file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2431call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2432
4ea904ed
SH
2433Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2434internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2435@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2436@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2437
2438@smallexample
2439int
2440f (void)
2441@{
2442 return 123;
2443@}
2444
2445int
2446g (void)
2447@{
2448 return f();
2449@}
2450@end smallexample
2451
6aa29e7b 2452@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2453@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2454@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2455@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2456Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2457(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2458section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2459
e41b3a13
JJ
2460@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2461@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2462Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2463generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2464if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2465
6c1439be
L
2466@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2467@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2468@item --enable-new-dtags
2469@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2470This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2471systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2472@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2473and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2474If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2475created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2476those options are only available for ELF systems.
2477
2d643429 2478@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2479@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2480Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2481close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2482time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2483increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2484value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2485
fdc90cb4
JJ
2486@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2487@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2488Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2489@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2490new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2491the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2492hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2493but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2494
0ce398f1
L
2495@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2496@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2497@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2498@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2499@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2500@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2501@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2502@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2503On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2504compressed using zlib.
2505
2506@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2507sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2508DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2509instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2510also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2511sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2512
2513The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2514@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2515
2516Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2517sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2518for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2519uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2520
2521The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2522involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2523default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2524@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2525
35835446
JR
2526@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2527@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2528This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2529linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2530for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2531about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2532
4f9c04f7 2533Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25341021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2535run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2536has been used.
2537
2538The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2539enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2540
c0065db7
RM
2541@kindex --build-id
2542@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2543@item --build-id
2544@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2545Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2546or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2547unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2548@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2549@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2550@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2551the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2552string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2553@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2554is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2555
2556The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2557that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2558unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2559to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2560file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2561string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2562
2563Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2564@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2565@end table
2566
0285c67d
NC
2567@c man end
2568
36f63dca 2569@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2570
0285c67d
NC
2571@c man begin OPTIONS
2572
ff5dcc92 2573The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2574the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2575normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2576use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2577@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2578like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2579symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2580object file).
2581
2582In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2583support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2584PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2585values by either a space or an equals sign.
2586
ff5dcc92 2587@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2588
2589@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2590@item --add-stdcall-alias
2591If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2592as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2594
2595@kindex --base-file
2596@item --base-file @var{file}
2597Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2598addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2599@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2600[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2601
2602@kindex --dll
2603@item --dll
2604Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2605@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2606file.
bb10df36 2607[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2608
88183869
DK
2609@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2610@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2611@item --enable-long-section-names
2612@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2613The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2614the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2615for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2616fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2617to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2618allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2619disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2620generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2621as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2622with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2623GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2624information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2625option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2626section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2627when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2628image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2629[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2630
252b5132
RH
2631@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2632@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2633@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2634@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2635If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2636do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2637only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2638resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2639undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2640@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2641to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2642warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2643import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2644to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2645feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2646@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2647mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2648[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2649
522f09cd
KT
2650@kindex --leading-underscore
2651@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2652@item --leading-underscore
2653@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2654For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2655in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2656disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2657
252b5132
RH
2658@cindex DLLs, creating
2659@kindex --export-all-symbols
2660@item --export-all-symbols
2661If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2662be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2663otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2664explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2665attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2666option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2667@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2668@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2669exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2670re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2671such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2672@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2673@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2674Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2675not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2676extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2677(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2678These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2679@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2680@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2681@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2682@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2683[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2684
2685@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2686@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2687Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2688exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2689[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2690
2927aaca
NC
2691@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2692@item --exclude-all-symbols
2693Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2694[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2695
252b5132
RH
2696@kindex --file-alignment
2697@item --file-alignment
2698Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2699file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2700512.
bb10df36 2701[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2702
2703@cindex heap size
2704@kindex --heap
2705@item --heap @var{reserve}
2706@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2707Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2708to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2709committed.
bb10df36 2710[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2711
2712@cindex image base
2713@kindex --image-base
2714@item --image-base @var{value}
2715Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2716the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2717is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2718your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2719other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2720for dlls.
bb10df36 2721[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2722
2723@kindex --kill-at
2724@item --kill-at
2725If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2726symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2727[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2728
26d2d8a2
BF
2729@kindex --large-address-aware
2730@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2731If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2732header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2733greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2734or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2735section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2736[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2737
f69a2f97
NC
2738@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2739@item --disable-large-address-aware
2740Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2741This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2742driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2743addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2744[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2745
252b5132
RH
2746@kindex --major-image-version
2747@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2748Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2749[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2750
2751@kindex --major-os-version
2752@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2753Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2757@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2758Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@kindex --minor-image-version
2762@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2763Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2765
2766@kindex --minor-os-version
2767@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2768Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2769[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2770
2771@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2772@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2773Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2775
2776@cindex DEF files, creating
2777@cindex DLLs, creating
2778@kindex --output-def
2779@item --output-def @var{file}
2780The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2781file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2782(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2783library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2784automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2785[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2786
b044cda1 2787@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2788@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2789@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2790@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2791Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2792@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2793By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2794for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2795execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2796[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2797
2798@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2799@item --disable-auto-image-base
2800Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2801user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2802default.
bb10df36 2803[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2804
2805@cindex DLLs, linking to
2806@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2807@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2808When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2809search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2810@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2811between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2812uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2813@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2814[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2815
2816@kindex --enable-auto-import
2817@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2818Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2819DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2820mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2821[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2822
2823The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2824feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2825
2826Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2827of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2828PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2829
e2a83dd0
NC
2830Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2831data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2832placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2833around a problem with consts that is described here:
2834http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2835
4d8907ac
DS
2836Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2837see this message:
0d888aac 2838
ece2d90e 2839"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2840documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2841
ece2d90e
NC
2842This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2843ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2844allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2845fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2846constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2847multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2848this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2849of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2850the warning, and exit.
2851
2852There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2853data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2854
2fa9fc65
NC
2855One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2856of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2857this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2858
c0065db7
RM
2859A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2860that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2861there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2862a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2863
2864@example
2865extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2866extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2867 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2868@end example
2869
2870or
2871
2872@example
2873extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2874extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2875 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2876@end example
2877
c0065db7 2878For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2879is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2880
2881@example
2882extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2883extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2884 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2885@end example
2886
c406afaf
NC
2887or
2888
2889@example
2890extern long long extern_ll;
2891extern_ll -->
2892 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2893@end example
2894
2fa9fc65 2895A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2896'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2897@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2898requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2899building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2900merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2901between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2902constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2903
2904Original:
2905@example
2906--foo.h
2907extern int arr[];
2908--foo.c
2909#include "foo.h"
2910void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2912@}
2913@end example
2914
2915Solution 1:
2916@example
2917--foo.h
2918extern int arr[];
2919--foo.c
2920#include "foo.h"
2921void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2922 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2923 volatile int *parr = arr;
2924 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2925@}
2926@end example
2927
2928Solution 2:
2929@example
2930--foo.h
2931/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2932#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2933 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2934#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2935#else
2936#define FOO_IMPORT
2937#endif
2938extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2939--foo.c
2940#include "foo.h"
2941void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2942 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2943@}
2944@end example
2945
c0065db7 2946A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2947library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2948for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2949functions).
b044cda1
CW
2950
2951@kindex --disable-auto-import
2952@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2953Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2954@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2955[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2956
2fa9fc65
NC
2957@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2958@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2959If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2960that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2961a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2962environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2963[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2964
2965@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2966@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2967Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2968[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2969
b044cda1
CW
2970@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2971@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2972Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2973[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2974
252b5132
RH
2975@kindex --section-alignment
2976@item --section-alignment
2977Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2978addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2979[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2980
2981@cindex stack size
2982@kindex --stack
2983@item --stack @var{reserve}
2984@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2985Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2986to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2987committed.
bb10df36 2988[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2989
2990@kindex --subsystem
2991@item --subsystem @var{which}
2992@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2993@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2994Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2995legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2996@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2997the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2998@var{which}.
bb10df36 2999[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 3000
2f563b51
DK
3001The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
3002of the PE file header:
3003[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
3004
2d5c3743
NC
3005@kindex --high-entropy-va
3006@item --high-entropy-va
3007Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3008(ASLR).
dc9bd8c9
HD
3009This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
3010@option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2d5c3743 3011
2f563b51
DK
3012@kindex --dynamicbase
3013@item --dynamicbase
3014The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3015randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3016Vista for i386 PE targets.
dc9bd8c9 3017This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
2f563b51
DK
3018
3019@kindex --forceinteg
3020@item --forceinteg
3021Code integrity checks are enforced.
3022
3023@kindex --nxcompat
3024@item --nxcompat
3025The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3026This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3027
3028@kindex --no-isolation
3029@item --no-isolation
3030Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3031
3032@kindex --no-seh
3033@item --no-seh
3034The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3035this image.
3036
3037@kindex --no-bind
3038@item --no-bind
3039Do not bind this image.
3040
3041@kindex --wdmdriver
3042@item --wdmdriver
3043The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3044
2f563b51
DK
3045@kindex --tsaware
3046@item --tsaware
3047The image is Terminal Server aware.
3048
0cb112f7
CF
3049@kindex --insert-timestamp
3050@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3051@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3052Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3053as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3054other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3055will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3056same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3057can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3058that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3059identically.
dc9bd8c9
HD
3060
3061@kindex --enable-reloc-section
3062@item --enable-reloc-section
3063Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3064is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
252b5132
RH
3065@end table
3066
0285c67d
NC
3067@c man end
3068
ac145307
BS
3069@ifset C6X
3070@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3071
3072@c man begin OPTIONS
3073
3074The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3075libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3076all executables use an index of 0.
3077
3078@table @gcctabopt
3079
3080@kindex --dsbt-size
3081@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3082This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3083or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3084entries.
3085
3086@kindex --dsbt-index
3087@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3088This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3089to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3090executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3091@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3092
fbd9ad90
PB
3093@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3094The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3095exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3096
ac145307
BS
3097@end table
3098
3099@c man end
3100@end ifset
3101
b8891f8d
AJ
3102@ifset CSKY
3103@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3104
3105@c man begin OPTIONS
3106
3107@table @gcctabopt
3108
3109@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3110@item --branch-stub
3111This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3112sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3113usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3114can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3115the compiler or assembler.
3116
3117@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3118@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3119This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3120It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3121be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3122stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3123sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3124@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3125linker should choose suitable defaults.
3126
3127@end table
3128
3129@c man end
3130@end ifset
3131
93fd0973
SC
3132@ifset M68HC11
3133@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3134
3135@c man begin OPTIONS
3136
3137The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3138memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3139
3140@table @gcctabopt
3141
3142@kindex --no-trampoline
3143@item --no-trampoline
3144This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3145is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3146instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3147
3148@kindex --bank-window
3149@item --bank-window @var{name}
3150This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3151the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3152The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3153paging and addresses within the memory window.
3154
3155@end table
3156
3157@c man end
3158@end ifset
3159
7fb9f789
NC
3160@ifset M68K
3161@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3162
3163@c man begin OPTIONS
3164
3165The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3166when linking for 68K targets.
3167
3168@table @gcctabopt
3169
3170@kindex --got
3171@item --got=@var{type}
3172This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3173@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3174@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3175Info entry for @file{ld}.
3176
3177@end table
3178
3179@c man end
3180@end ifset
3181
833794fc
MR
3182@ifset MIPS
3183@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3184
3185@c man begin OPTIONS
3186
3187The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3188generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3189linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3190
3191@table @gcctabopt
3192
3193@kindex --insn32
3194@item --insn32
3195@kindex --no-insn32
3196@itemx --no-insn32
3197These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3198generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3199or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
320032-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3201used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3202possible.
3203
8b10b0b3
MR
3204@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3205@item --ignore-branch-isa
3206@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3207@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3208These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3209transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3210accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3211is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3212instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3213equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3214calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3215a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3216an error.
3217
3734320d
MF
3218@kindex --compact-branches
3219@item --compact-branches
3220@kindex --no-compact-branches
3221@item --compact-branches
3222These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3223in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3224
833794fc
MR
3225@end table
3226
3227@c man end
3228@end ifset
3229
252b5132
RH
3230@ifset UsesEnvVars
3231@node Environment
3232@section Environment Variables
3233
0285c67d
NC
3234@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3235
560e09e9 3236You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3237@ifclear SingleFormat
3238@code{GNUTARGET},
3239@end ifclear
3240@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3241
36f63dca 3242@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3243@kindex GNUTARGET
3244@cindex default input format
3245@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3246use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3247of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3248@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3249of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3250attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3251this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3252there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3253object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3254BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3255in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3256@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3257
3258@kindex LDEMULATION
3259@cindex default emulation
3260@cindex emulation, default
3261@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3262@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3263behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3264available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3265the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3266variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3267linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3268
3269@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3270@cindex demangling, default
3271Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3272@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3273default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3274a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3275may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3276options.
3277
0285c67d
NC
3278@c man end
3279@end ifset
3280
252b5132
RH
3281@node Scripts
3282@chapter Linker Scripts
3283
3284@cindex scripts
3285@cindex linker scripts
3286@cindex command files
3287Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3288written in the linker command language.
3289
3290The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3291the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3292the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3293more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3294direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3295described below.
3296
3297The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3298yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3299linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3300to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3301such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3302
3303You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3304line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3305default linker script.
3306
3307You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3308to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3309Linker Scripts}.
3310
3311@menu
3312* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3313* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3314* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3315* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3316* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3317* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3318* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3319* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3320* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3321* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3322* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3323@end menu
3324
3325@node Basic Script Concepts
3326@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3327@cindex linker script concepts
3328We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3329describe the linker script language.
3330
3331The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3332file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3333@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3334The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3335purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3336among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3337section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3338in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3339
3340Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3341also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3342contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3343the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3344A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3345area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3346loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3347which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3348of debugging information.
3349
3350Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3351first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3352the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3353@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3354section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3355same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3356is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3357(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3358based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3359RAM address would be the VMA.
3360
3361You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3362program with the @samp{-h} option.
3363
3364Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3365@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3366has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3367information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3368will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3369static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3370referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3371
3372You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3373program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3374option.
3375
3376@node Script Format
3377@section Linker Script Format
3378@cindex linker script format
3379Linker scripts are text files.
3380
3381You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3382either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3383symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3384generally ignored.
3385
3386Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3387If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3388otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3389double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3390file name.
3391
3392You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3393@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3394to whitespace.
3395
3396@node Simple Example
3397@section Simple Linker Script Example
3398@cindex linker script example
3399@cindex example of linker script
3400Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3401
3402The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3403@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3404memory layout of the output file.
3405
3406The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3407describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3408code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3409@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3410Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3411your input files.
3412
3413For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
34140x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3415linker script which will do that:
3416@smallexample
3417SECTIONS
3418@{
3419 . = 0x10000;
3420 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3421 . = 0x8000000;
3422 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3423 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3424@}
3425@end smallexample
3426
3427You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3428followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3429descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3430
252b5132
RH
3431The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3432sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3433counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3434other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3435current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3436incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3437@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3438
3439The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3440required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3441after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3442which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3443wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3444means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3445
3446Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3447@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3448@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3449
3450The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3451the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3452at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3453output section, the value of the location counter will be
3454@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3455effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3456immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3457
3458The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3459alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3460example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3461sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3462may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3463sections.
3464
3465That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3466
3467@node Simple Commands
3468@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3469@cindex linker script simple commands
3470In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3471
3472@menu
3473* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3474* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3475@ifclear SingleFormat
3476* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3477@end ifclear
3478
4a93e180 3479* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3480* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3481@end menu
3482
3483@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3484@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3485@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3486@cindex start of execution
3487@cindex first instruction
3488@cindex entry point
3489The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3490point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3491entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3492@smallexample
3493ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3494@end smallexample
3495
3496There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3497entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3498stopping when one of them succeeds:
3499@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3500@item
252b5132 3501the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3502@item
252b5132 3503the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3504@item
a094d01f 3505the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3506targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3507check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3508@item
252b5132 3509the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3510@item
252b5132
RH
3511The address @code{0}.
3512@end itemize
3513
3514@node File Commands
36f63dca 3515@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3516@cindex linker script file commands
3517Several linker script commands deal with files.
3518
3519@table @code
3520@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3521@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3522@cindex including a linker script
3523Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3524be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3525with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
352610 levels deep.
3527
4006703d
NS
3528You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3529@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3530
252b5132
RH
3531@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3532@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3533@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3534@cindex input files in linker scripts
3535@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3536@cindex linker script input object files
3537The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3538in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3539
3540For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3541a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3542then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3543
3544In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3545script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3546
e3f2db7f
AO
3547In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3548with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3549located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3550for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3551open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3552linker will search through the archive library search path.
3553The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3554as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3555path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3556@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3557
ff5dcc92 3558If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3559name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3560@samp{-l}.
3561
3562When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3563files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3564script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3565
3566@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3567@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3568@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3569@cindex grouping input files
3570The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3571files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3572new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3573in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3574
b717d30e
JJ
3575@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3576@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3577@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3578This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3579commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3580as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3581with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3582when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3583@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3584and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3585setting afterwards.
3586
252b5132
RH
3587@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3588@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3589@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3590The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3591@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3592@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3593Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3594precedence.
3595
3596You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3597output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3598
3599@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3600@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3601@cindex library search path in linker script
3602@cindex archive search path in linker script
3603@cindex search path in linker script
3604The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3605@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3606@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3607on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3608are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3609the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3610
3611@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3612@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3613@cindex first input file
3614The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3615that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3616though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3617when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3618first file.
3619@end table
3620
3621@ifclear SingleFormat
3622@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3623@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3624A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3625
3626@table @code
3627@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3628@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3629@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3630@cindex output file format in linker script
3631The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3632output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3633exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3634(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3635line option takes precedence.
3636
3637You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3638formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3639This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3640desired endianness.
3641
3642If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3643will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3644output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3645used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3646
3647For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3648command:
3649@smallexample
3650OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3651@end smallexample
3652This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3653@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3654option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3655format.
3656
3657@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3658@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3659@cindex input file format in linker script
3660The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3661files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3662This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3663(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3664is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3665command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3666@end table
3667@end ifclear
3668
4a93e180
NC
3669@node REGION_ALIAS
3670@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3671@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3672@cindex region alias
3673@cindex region names
3674
3675Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3676@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3677
3678@smallexample
3679REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3680@end smallexample
3681
3682The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3683memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3684to memory regions. An example follows.
3685
3686Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3687memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3688that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3689non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3690access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3691read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3692sections:
3693
3694@itemize @bullet
3695@item
3696@code{.text} program code;
3697@item
3698@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3699@item
3700@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3701@item
3702@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3703@end itemize
3704
3705The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3706part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3707output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3708systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3709@code{C}:
3710@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3711@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3712@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3713@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3714@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3715@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3716@end multitable
3717The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3718loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3719the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3720the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3721
3722The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3723includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3724memory layout:
3725@smallexample
3726INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3727
3728SECTIONS
3729 @{
3730 .text :
3731 @{
3732 *(.text)
3733 @} > REGION_TEXT
3734 .rodata :
3735 @{
3736 *(.rodata)
3737 rodata_end = .;
3738 @} > REGION_RODATA
3739 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3740 @{
3741 data_start = .;
3742 *(.data)
3743 @} > REGION_DATA
3744 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3745 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3746 .bss :
3747 @{
3748 *(.bss)
3749 @} > REGION_BSS
3750 @}
3751@end smallexample
3752
3753Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3754regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3755variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3756@table @code
3757@item A
3758Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3759@smallexample
3760MEMORY
3761 @{
3762 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3763 @}
3764
3765REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3766REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3767REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3768REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3769@end smallexample
3770@item B
3771Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3772into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3773@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3774@smallexample
3775MEMORY
3776 @{
3777 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3778 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3779 @}
3780
3781REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3782REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3783REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3784REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3785@end smallexample
3786@item C
3787Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3788@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3789initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3790system start into the @code{RAM}.
3791@smallexample
3792MEMORY
3793 @{
3794 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3795 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3796 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3797 @}
3798
3799REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3800REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3801REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3802REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3803@end smallexample
3804@end table
3805
3806It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3807@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3808necessary:
3809@smallexample
3810#include <string.h>
3811
3812extern char data_start [];
3813extern char data_size [];
3814extern char data_load_start [];
3815
3816void copy_data(void)
3817@{
3818 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3819 @{
3820 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3821 @}
3822@}
3823@end smallexample
3824
252b5132 3825@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3826@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3827There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3828
3829@table @code
3830@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3831@kindex ASSERT
3832@cindex assertion in linker script
3833Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3834with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3835
fd1c4238
NC
3836Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3837take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3838inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3839for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3840symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3841
3842@smallexample
3843 .stack :
3844 @{
3845 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3846 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3847 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3848 @}
3849@end smallexample
3850
3851will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3852PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3853can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3854
3855@smallexample
3856 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3857 .stack :
3858 @{
3859 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3860 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3861 @}
3862@end smallexample
3863
3864will work.
3865
252b5132
RH
3866@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3867@kindex EXTERN
3868@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3869Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3870symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3871modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3872each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3873command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3874
3875@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3876@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3877@cindex common allocation in linker script
3878This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3879to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3880output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3881
4818e05f
AM
3882@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3883@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3884@cindex common allocation in linker script
3885This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3886command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3887to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3888
7bdf4127
AB
3889@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3890@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3891@cindex group allocation in linker script
3892@cindex section groups
3893@cindex COMDAT
3894This command has the same effect as the
3895@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3896@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3897and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3898specified (@samp{-r}).
3899
53d25da6
AM
3900@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3901@kindex INSERT
3902@cindex insert user script into default script
3903This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3904augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3905inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3906@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3907default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3908sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3909linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3910insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3911linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3912default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3913of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3914to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3915is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3916
3917@smallexample
3918SECTIONS
3919@{
3920 OVERLAY :
3921 @{
3922 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3923 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3924 @}
3925@}
3926INSERT AFTER .text;
3927@end smallexample
3928
252b5132
RH
3929@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3930@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3931@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3932This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3933references among certain output sections.
3934
3935In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3936using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3937will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3938errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3939a function defined in the other section.
3940
3941The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3942@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3943an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3944@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3945names.
3946
cdf96953
MF
3947@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3948@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3949@cindex cross references
3950This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3951references to one section from a list of other sections.
3952
3953The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3954output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3955a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3956there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3957must never call back.
3958
3959The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3960The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3961If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3962the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3963status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3964names, not input section names.
3965
252b5132
RH
3966@ifclear SingleFormat
3967@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3968@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3969@cindex machine architecture
3970@cindex architecture
3971Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3972of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3973architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3974the @samp{-f} option.
3975@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3976
3977@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3978@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3979This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3980@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3981in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3982@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3983@end table
3984
3985@node Assignments
3986@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3987@cindex assignment in scripts
3988@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3989@cindex variables, defining
3990You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3991the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3992
3993@menu
3994* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3995* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3996* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3997* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3998* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3999@end menu
4000
4001@node Simple Assignments
4002@subsection Simple Assignments
4003
4004You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
4005
4006@table @code
4007@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
4008@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
4009@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
4010@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4011@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4012@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4013@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4014@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4015@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4016@end table
4017
4018The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4019@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4020defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4021
4022The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4023may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4024
4025The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4026
4027Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4028
4029You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4030statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4031section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4032
4033The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4034expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4035
4036Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4037assignments may be used:
4038
4039@smallexample
4040floating_point = 0;
4041SECTIONS
4042@{
4043 .text :
4044 @{
4045 *(.text)
4046 _etext = .;
4047 @}
156e34dd 4048 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4049 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4050@}
4051@end smallexample
4052@noindent
4053In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4054zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4055the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4056defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4057upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4058
eb8476a6
MR
4059@node HIDDEN
4060@subsection HIDDEN
4061@cindex HIDDEN
4062For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4063exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4064
4065Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4066@code{HIDDEN}:
4067
4068@smallexample
4069HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4070SECTIONS
4071@{
4072 .text :
4073 @{
4074 *(.text)
4075 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4076 @}
4077 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4078 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4079@}
4080@end smallexample
4081@noindent
4082In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4083
252b5132
RH
4084@node PROVIDE
4085@subsection PROVIDE
4086@cindex PROVIDE
4087In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4088only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4089the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4090@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4091@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4092@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4093@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4094@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4095
4096Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4097@smallexample
4098SECTIONS
4099@{
4100 .text :
4101 @{
4102 *(.text)
4103 _etext = .;
4104 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4105 @}
4106@}
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4110underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4111the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4112underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4113If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4114linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4115
b0daac83
NC
4116Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4117defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4118that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4119when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4120@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4121
7af8e998
L
4122@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4123@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4124@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4125Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4126hidden and won't be exported.
4127
73ae6183
NC
4128@node Source Code Reference
4129@subsection Source Code Reference
4130
4131Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4132intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4133a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4134symbol that does not have a value.
4135
4136Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4137transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4138stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4139prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4140mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4141of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4142variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4143linker script variable might be referred to as:
4144
4145@smallexample
4146 extern int foo;
4147@end smallexample
4148
4149But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4150
4151@smallexample
4152 _foo = 1000;
4153@end smallexample
4154
4155In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4156transformation has taken place.
4157
4158When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4159things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4160in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4161second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4162table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4163contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4164value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4165
4166@smallexample
4167 int foo = 1000;
4168@end smallexample
4169
10bf6894 4170creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4171holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4172number 1000 is initially stored.
4173
4174When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4175first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4176memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4177So:
4178
4179@smallexample
4180 foo = 1;
4181@end smallexample
4182
4183looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4184associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4185address. Whereas:
4186
4187@smallexample
4188 int * a = & foo;
4189@end smallexample
4190
10bf6894 4191looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4192and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4193the variable @samp{a}.
4194
4195Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4196the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4197an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4198
4199@smallexample
4200 foo = 1000;
4201@end smallexample
4202
4203creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4204the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4205address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4206linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4207access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4208
4209Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4210you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4211use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4212section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4213linker script contains these declarations:
4214
4215@smallexample
4216@group
4217 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4218 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4219 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4220@end group
4221@end smallexample
4222
4223Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4224
4225@smallexample
4226@group
4227 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4228
73ae6183
NC
4229 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4230@end group
4231@end smallexample
4232
4233Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4234Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4235arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4236
4237@smallexample
4238@group
4239 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4240
4241 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4242@end group
4243@end smallexample
4244
4245Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4246operators.
73ae6183 4247
252b5132 4248@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4249@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4250@kindex SECTIONS
4251The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4252into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4253
4254The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4255@smallexample
4256SECTIONS
4257@{
4258 @var{sections-command}
4259 @var{sections-command}
4260 @dots{}
4261@}
4262@end smallexample
4263
4264Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4265
4266@itemize @bullet
4267@item
4268an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4269@item
4270a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4271@item
4272an output section description
4273@item
4274an overlay description
4275@end itemize
4276
4277The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4278@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4279those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4280understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4281the layout of the output file.
4282
4283Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4284below.
4285
4286If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4287linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4288section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4289input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4290example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4291in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4292
4293@menu
4294* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4295* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4296* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4297* Input Section:: Input section description
4298* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4299* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4300* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4301* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4302* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4303@end menu
4304
4305@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4306@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4307The full description of an output section looks like this:
4308@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4309@group
7e7d5768 4310@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4311 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4312 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4313 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4314 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4315 @{
4316 @var{output-section-command}
4317 @var{output-section-command}
4318 @dots{}
abc9061b 4319 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4320@end group
4321@end smallexample
4322
4323Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4324
4325The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4326name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4327The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4328the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4329The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4330
4331Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4332
4333@itemize @bullet
4334@item
4335a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4336@item
4337an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4338@item
4339data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4340@item
4341a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4342@end itemize
4343
4344@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4345@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4346@cindex name, section
4347@cindex section name
4348The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4349meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4350support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4351must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4352example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4353output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4354names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4355quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4356characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4357commas must be quoted.
4358
4359The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4360Discarding}.
4361
4362@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4363@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4364@cindex address, section
4365@cindex section address
4366The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4367address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4368is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4369
4370If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4371section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4372to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4373alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4374contained within the output section.
4375
4376The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4377
4378@itemize @bullet
4379@item
4380If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4381is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4382in that region.
4383
4384@item
4385If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4386regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4387section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4388be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4389
4390@item
4391If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4392the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4393counter.
4394@end itemize
4395
4396@noindent
4397For example:
4398
252b5132
RH
4399@smallexample
4400.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4401@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4402
252b5132
RH
4403@noindent
4404and
ea5cae92 4405
252b5132
RH
4406@smallexample
4407.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4408@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4409
252b5132
RH
4410@noindent
4411are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4412@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4413counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4414counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4415input sections.
252b5132
RH
4416
4417The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4418For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4419so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4420do something like this:
4421@smallexample
4422.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4423@end smallexample
4424@noindent
4425This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4426aligned upward to the specified value.
4427
4428Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4429location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4430sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4431
4432@node Input Section
36f63dca 4433@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4434@cindex input sections
4435@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4436The most common output section command is an input section description.
4437
4438The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4439You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4440in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4441map the input files into your memory layout.
4442
4443@menu
4444* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4445* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4446* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4447* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4448* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4449@end menu
4450
4451@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4452@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4453@cindex input section basics
4454An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4455by a list of section names in parentheses.
4456
4457The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4458describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4459
4460The most common input section description is to include all input
4461sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4462include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4463@smallexample
4464*(.text)
4465@end smallexample
4466@noindent
18625d54 4467Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4468@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4469of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4470match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4471example:
252b5132 4472@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4473EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4474@end smallexample
4475@noindent
4476will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4477and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4478placed inside the section list, for example:
4479@smallexample
b4346c09 4480*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4481@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4482@noindent
4483The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4484two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4485more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4486
4487There are two ways to include more than one section:
4488@smallexample
4489*(.text .rdata)
4490*(.text) *(.rdata)
4491@end smallexample
4492@noindent
4493The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4494@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4495first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4496they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4497@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4498@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4499
8f1732fc
AB
4500When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4501is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4502immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4503@smallexample
4504*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4505@end smallexample
4506@noindent
4507will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4508@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4509from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4510exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4511could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4512@smallexample
4513*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4514@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4515@noindent
4516Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4517before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4518all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4519@smallexample
4520EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4521@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4522
252b5132
RH
4523You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4524You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4525needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4526@smallexample
4527data.o(.data)
4528@end smallexample
4529
ae17ab41
CM
4530To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4531of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4532
4533Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4534
4535@smallexample
4536@group
4537SECTIONS @{
4538 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4539 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4540@}
4541@end group
4542@end smallexample
4543
4544In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4545input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4546@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4547@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4548whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4549
967928e9
AM
4550You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4551matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4552with no whitespace around the colon.
4553
4554@table @samp
4555@item archive:file
4556matches file within archive
4557@item archive:
4558matches the whole archive
4559@item :file
4560matches file but not one in an archive
4561@end table
4562
4563Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4564wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4565single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4566@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4567within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4568also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4569other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4570from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4571command.
4572
252b5132
RH
4573If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4574the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4575commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4576@smallexample
4577data.o
4578@end smallexample
4579
967928e9
AM
4580When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4581and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4582characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4583name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4584did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4585though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4586@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4587the archive search path.
4588
4589@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4590@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4591@cindex input section wildcards
4592@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4593@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4594@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4595In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4596name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4597
4598The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4599pattern for the file name.
4600
4601The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4602
4603@table @samp
4604@item *
4605matches any number of characters
4606@item ?
4607matches any single character
4608@item [@var{chars}]
4609matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4610character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4611@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4612@item \
4613quotes the following character
4614@end table
4615
4616When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4617will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4618Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4619exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4620@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4621a @samp{/} character.
4622
4623File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4624specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4625does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4626
4627If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4628appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4629will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4630sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4631@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4632@smallexample
4633.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4634.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4635@end smallexample
4636
bcaa7b3e 4637@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4638Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4639in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4640this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4641pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4642@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4643into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4644
bcaa7b3e 4645@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
9a24a276
AM
4646@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4647@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4648alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4649alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4650needed.
bcaa7b3e 4651
02ecc8e9 4652@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
9a24a276
AM
4653@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4654@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4655numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4656section name before placing them in the output file. In
4657@code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4658the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4659@code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
02ecc8e9 4660
bcaa7b3e
L
4661@cindex SORT
4662@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4663
4664When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4665can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4666
4667@enumerate
4668@item
4669@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4670It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4671sections have the same name.
4672@item
4673@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4674It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4675sections have the same alignment.
4676@item
c0065db7 4677@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4678treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4679@item
4680@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4681is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4682@item
4683All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4684@end enumerate
4685
a05a5b64 4686When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4687section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4688takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4689
4690If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4691command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4692treated as nested sorting command.
4693
4694@enumerate
4695@item
4696@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4697@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4698@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4699@item
4700@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4701@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4702@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4703@end enumerate
4704
4705If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4706command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4707
eda680f8 4708@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4709@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4710section sorting option.
4711
252b5132
RH
4712If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4713@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4714precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4715
4716This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4717files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4718sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4719The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4720with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4721linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4722@smallexample
4723@group
4724SECTIONS @{
4725 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4726 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4727 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4728 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4729@}
4730@end group
4731@end smallexample
4732
4733@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4734@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4735@cindex common symbol placement
4736@cindex uninitialized data placement
4737A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4738file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4739linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4740named @samp{COMMON}.
4741
4742You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4743other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4744particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4745input files are placed in another section.
4746
4747In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4748@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4749@smallexample
4750.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4751@end smallexample
4752
4753@cindex scommon section
4754@cindex small common symbols
4755Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4756example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4757symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4758different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4759the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4760symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4761to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4762locations.
4763
4764@cindex [COMMON]
4765You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4766notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4767@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4768
4769@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4770@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4771@cindex KEEP
4772@cindex garbage collection
4773When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4774it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4775This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4776with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4777@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4778
4779@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4780@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4781The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4782to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4783start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4784@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4785follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4786@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4787@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4788All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4789files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4790
4791@smallexample
4792@group
4793SECTIONS @{
4794 outputa 0x10000 :
4795 @{
4796 all.o
4797 foo.o (.input1)
4798 @}
36f63dca
NC
4799@end group
4800@group
252b5132
RH
4801 outputb :
4802 @{
4803 foo.o (.input2)
4804 foo1.o (.input1)
4805 @}
36f63dca
NC
4806@end group
4807@group
252b5132
RH
4808 outputc :
4809 @{
4810 *(.input1)
4811 *(.input2)
4812 @}
4813@}
4814@end group
a1ab1d2a 4815@end smallexample
252b5132 4816
cbd0eecf
L
4817If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4818and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4819automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4820__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4821indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4822respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4823C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4824
252b5132 4825@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4826@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4827@cindex data
4828@cindex section data
4829@cindex output section data
4830@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4831@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4832@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4833@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4834@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4835You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4836@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4837an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4838parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4839value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4840counter.
4841
4842The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4843store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4844bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4845stored.
4846
4847For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4848of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4849@smallexample
4850BYTE(1)
4851LONG(addr)
4852@end smallexample
4853
4854When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4855same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4856target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4857@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4858@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4859
4860If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4861which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4862When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4863true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4864endianness of the first input object file.
4865
36f63dca 4866Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4867between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4868@smallexample
4869SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4870@end smallexample
4871whereas this will work:
4872@smallexample
4873SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4874@end smallexample
4875
252b5132
RH
4876@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4877@cindex holes, filling
4878@cindex unspecified memory
4879You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4880current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4881otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4882gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4883with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4884necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4885point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4886than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4887different parts of an output section.
4888
4889This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4890value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4891@smallexample
563e308f 4892FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4893@end smallexample
4894
4895The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4896section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4897part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4898entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4899precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4900expression.
252b5132
RH
4901
4902@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4903@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4904There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4905commands.
4906
4907@table @code
4908@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4909@cindex input filename symbols
4910@cindex filename symbols
4911@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4912The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4913The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4914file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4915the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4916
4917This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4918normally used for any other object file format.
4919
4920@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4921@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4922@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4923@item CONSTRUCTORS
4924When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4925unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4926destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4927arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4928automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4929For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4930linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4931@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4932ignored for other object file formats.
4933
4934The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4935constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4936Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4937the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4938first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4939of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4940compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4941formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4942@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4943the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4944destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4945@code{exit}.
4946
4947For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4948arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4949addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4950and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4951linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4952runtime code expects to see.
4953
4954@smallexample
4955 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4956 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4957 *(.ctors)
4958 LONG(0)
4959 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4960 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4961 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4962 *(.dtors)
4963 LONG(0)
4964 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4965@end smallexample
4966
4967If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4968which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4969are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4970are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4971command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4972@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4973@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4974@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4975
4976Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4977and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4978need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4979scripts.
4980
4981@end table
4982
4983@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4984@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4985@cindex discarding sections
4986@cindex sections, discarding
4987@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4988The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4989This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4990may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4991@smallexample
49c13adb 4992.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4993@end smallexample
4994@noindent
4995will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4996@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4997sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4998space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4999too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
5000space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
5001@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
5002@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
5003This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 5004
a0976ea4 5005The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
5006on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
5007symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
5008the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
5009section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
5010
5011@cindex /DISCARD/
5012The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5013input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5014section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5015
a2e098c3
NC
5016Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5017discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5018members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5019Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5020
252b5132 5021@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 5022@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
5023@cindex output section attributes
5024We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5025like this:
0c71d759 5026
252b5132 5027@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5028@group
7e7d5768 5029@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5030 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5031 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5032 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5033 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5034 @{
5035 @var{output-section-command}
5036 @var{output-section-command}
5037 @dots{}
562d3460 5038 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5039@end group
5040@end smallexample
0c71d759 5041
252b5132
RH
5042We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5043@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5044remaining section attributes.
5045
a1ab1d2a 5046@menu
252b5132
RH
5047* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5048* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5049* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5050* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5051* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5052* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5053* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5054* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5055@end menu
5056
5057@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5058@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5059Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5060parentheses. The following types are defined:
5061
5062@table @code
5063@item NOLOAD
5064The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5065loaded into memory when the program is run.
5066@item DSECT
5067@itemx COPY
5068@itemx INFO
5069@itemx OVERLAY
5070These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5071rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5072marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5073section when the program is run.
5074@end table
5075
5076@kindex NOLOAD
5077@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5078@cindex loading, preventing
5079The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5080the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5081the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5082@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5083need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5084@smallexample
5085@group
5086SECTIONS @{
5087 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5088 @dots{}
5089@}
5090@end group
5091@end smallexample
5092
5093@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5094@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5095@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5096@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5097@cindex load address
5098@cindex section load address
5099Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5100@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5101@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5102specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5103address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5104
ea5cae92
NC
5105The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5106specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5107takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5108load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5109region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5110
5111If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5112section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5113load address:
5114
5115@itemize @bullet
5116@item
5117If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5118the LMA address as well.
5119
5120@item
5121If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5122
5123@item
5124Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5125with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5126section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5127VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5128the last section in the located region.
5129
5130@item
5131If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5132that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5133
5134@item
5135If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5136section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5137@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5138
5139@cindex ROM initialized data
5140@cindex initialized data in ROM
5141This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5142example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5143called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5144@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5145even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5146uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5147defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5148counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5149
5150@smallexample
5151@group
5152SECTIONS
5153 @{
5154 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5155 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5156 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5157 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5158 .bss 0x3000 :
5159 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5160@}
5161@end group
5162@end smallexample
5163
5164The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5165this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5166the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5167how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5168script.
5169
5170@smallexample
5171@group
5172extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5173char *src = &_etext;
5174char *dst = &_data;
5175
ea5cae92
NC
5176/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5177while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5178 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5179
ea5cae92 5180/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5181for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5182 *dst = 0;
5183@end group
5184@end smallexample
5185
bbf115d3
L
5186@node Forced Output Alignment
5187@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5188@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5189@cindex forcing output section alignment
5190@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5191You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5192alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5193intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5194
7e7d5768
AM
5195@node Forced Input Alignment
5196@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5197@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5198@cindex forcing input section alignment
5199@cindex input section alignment
5200You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5201SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5202sections, whether larger or smaller.
5203
0c71d759
NC
5204@node Output Section Constraint
5205@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5206@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5207@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5208@cindex constraints on output sections
5209You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5210of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5211read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5212@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5213
252b5132 5214@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5215@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5216@kindex >@var{region}
5217@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5218@cindex memory regions and sections
5219You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5220using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5221
5222Here is a simple example:
5223@smallexample
5224@group
5225MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5226SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5227@end group
5228@end smallexample
5229
5230@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5231@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5232@kindex :@var{phdr}
5233@cindex section, assigning to program header
5234@cindex program headers and sections
5235You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5236using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5237one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5238assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5239@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5240linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5241
5242Here is a simple example:
5243@smallexample
5244@group
5245PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5246SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5247@end group
5248@end smallexample
5249
5250@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5251@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5252@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5253@cindex section fill pattern
5254@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5255You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5256@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5257(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5258within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5259alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5260necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5261of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5262an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5263fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5264other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5265pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5266expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5267
5268You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5269output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5270
5271Here is a simple example:
5272@smallexample
5273@group
563e308f 5274SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5275@end group
5276@end smallexample
5277
5278@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5279@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5280@kindex OVERLAY
5281@cindex overlays
5282An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5283are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5284the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5285copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5286required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5287can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5288than another.
5289
5290Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5291@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5292output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5293command is as follows:
5294@smallexample
5295@group
5296OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5297 @{
5298 @var{secname1}
5299 @{
5300 @var{output-section-command}
5301 @var{output-section-command}
5302 @dots{}
5303 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5304 @var{secname2}
5305 @{
5306 @var{output-section-command}
5307 @var{output-section-command}
5308 @dots{}
5309 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5310 @dots{}
abc9061b 5311 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5312@end group
5313@end smallexample
5314
5315Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5316section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5317section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5318those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5319except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5320sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5321
abc9061b
CC
5322The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5323the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5324
252b5132
RH
5325The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5326addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5327memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5328whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5329and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5330and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5331
56dd11f0
NC
5332If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5333references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5334the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5335sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5336@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5337
5338For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5339provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5340defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5341@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5342the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5343within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5344symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5345
5346At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5347the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5348
5349Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5350@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5351@smallexample
5352@group
5353 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5354 @{
5355 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5356 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5357 @}
5358@end group
5359@end smallexample
5360@noindent
5361This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5362address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5363@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5364following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5365@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5366@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5367
5368C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5369like the following.
5370
5371@smallexample
5372@group
5373 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5374 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5375 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5376@end group
5377@end smallexample
5378
5379Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5380everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5381example could have been written identically as follows.
5382
5383@smallexample
5384@group
5385 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5386 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5387 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5388 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5389 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5390 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5391 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5392@end group
5393@end smallexample
5394
5395@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5396@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5397@kindex MEMORY
5398@cindex memory regions
5399@cindex regions of memory
5400@cindex allocating memory
5401@cindex discontinuous memory
5402The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5403memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5404
5405The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5406memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5407may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5408can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5409set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5410regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5411around to fit into the available regions.
5412
127fcdff
AB
5413A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5414however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5415specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5416@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5417@smallexample
5418@group
a1ab1d2a 5419MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5420 @{
5421 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5422 @dots{}
5423 @}
5424@end group
5425@end smallexample
5426
5427The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5428region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5429Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5430with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5431must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5432add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5433command.
252b5132
RH
5434
5435@cindex memory region attributes
5436The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5437whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5438not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5439@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5440section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5441the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5442them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5443
5444The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5445@table @samp
5446@item R
5447Read-only section
5448@item W
5449Read/write section
5450@item X
5451Executable section
5452@item A
5453Allocatable section
5454@item I
5455Initialized section
5456@item L
5457Same as @samp{I}
5458@item !
c09e9a8c 5459Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5460@end table
5461
81c688d5 5462If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5463@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5464attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5465unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5466not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5467string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5468or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5469the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5470
5471@kindex ORIGIN =
5472@kindex o =
5473@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5474The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5475the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5476cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5477abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5478@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5479
5480@kindex LENGTH =
5481@kindex len =
5482@kindex l =
5483The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5484region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5485be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5486@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5487
5488In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5489available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5490and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5491linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5492is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5493or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5494explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5495region.
5496
5497@smallexample
5498@group
a1ab1d2a 5499MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5500 @{
5501 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5502 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5503 @}
5504@end group
5505@end smallexample
5506
5507Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5508specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5509@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5510a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5511output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5512was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5513the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5514output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5515region, the linker will issue an error message.
5516
3ec57632 5517It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5518expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5519@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5520
5521@smallexample
5522@group
c0065db7 5523 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5524@end group
5525@end smallexample
5526
252b5132
RH
5527@node PHDRS
5528@section PHDRS Command
5529@kindex PHDRS
5530@cindex program headers
5531@cindex ELF program headers
5532@cindex program segments
5533@cindex segments, ELF
5534The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5535@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5536loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5537program with the @samp{-p} option.
5538
5539When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5540reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5541program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5542This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5543interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5544
5545The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5546in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5547precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5548the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5549not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5550
5551The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5552generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5553ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5554
5555This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5556@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5557
5558@smallexample
5559@group
5560PHDRS
5561@{
5562 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5563 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5564@}
5565@end group
5566@end smallexample
5567
5568The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5569of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5570header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5571with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5572must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5573is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5574
5575Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5576system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5577specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5578sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5579attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5580Section Phdr}.
5581
5582It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5583merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5584repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5585contain the section.
5586
5587If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5588then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5589not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5590convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5591placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5592default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5593segment at all.
5594
5595@kindex FILEHDR
5596@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5597You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5598the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5599The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5600file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5601include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5602segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5603these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5604
5605The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5606value of the keyword.
5607
5608@table @asis
5609@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5610Indicates an unused program header.
5611
5612@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5613Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5614the file.
5615
5616@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5617Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5618
5619@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5620Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5621found.
5622
5623@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5624Indicates a segment holding note information.
5625
5626@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5627A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5628ABI.
5629
5630@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5631Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5632
1a9ccd70
NC
5633@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5634Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5635
252b5132
RH
5636@item @var{expression}
5637An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5638be used for types not defined above.
5639@end table
5640
5641You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5642in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5643@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5644Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5645output section attribute.
5646
5647The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5648which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5649explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5650an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5651header.
5652
5653Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5654headers used on a native ELF system.
5655
5656@example
5657@group
5658PHDRS
5659@{
5660 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5661 interp PT_INTERP ;
5662 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5663 data PT_LOAD ;
5664 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5665@}
5666
5667SECTIONS
5668@{
5669 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5670 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5671 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5672 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5673 @dots{}
5674 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5675 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5676 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5677 @dots{}
5678@}
5679@end group
5680@end example
5681
5682@node VERSION
5683@section VERSION Command
5684@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5685@cindex symbol versions
5686@cindex version script
5687@cindex versions of symbols
5688The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5689only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5690symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5691a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5692shared library.
5693
5694You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5695you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5696also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5697
5698The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5699@smallexample
5700VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5701@end smallexample
5702
5703The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5704Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5705version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5706version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5707version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5708scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5709library.
5710
5711The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5712examples.
5713
5714@smallexample
5715VERS_1.1 @{
5716 global:
5717 foo1;
5718 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5719 old*;
5720 original*;
5721 new*;
252b5132
RH
5722@};
5723
5724VERS_1.2 @{
5725 foo2;
5726@} VERS_1.1;
5727
5728VERS_2.0 @{
5729 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5730 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5731 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5732 "f(int, double)";
5733 @};
252b5132
RH
5734@} VERS_1.2;
5735@end smallexample
5736
5737This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5738version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5739The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5740a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5741of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5742symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5743is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5744in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5745However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5746name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5747
5748Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5749depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5750to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5751
5752Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5753depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5754and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5755
5756When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5757specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5758unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5759unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5760somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5761wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5762wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5763set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5764ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5765
5766The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5767they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5768could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5769However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5770
0f6bf451 5771Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5772in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5773symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5774won't.
5775
5776@smallexample
7c9c73be 5777@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5778@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5779
252b5132
RH
5780When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5781symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5782requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5783shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5784loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5785linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5786application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5787way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5788all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5789search for each symbol reference.
5790
5791The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5792doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5793that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5794functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5795the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5796required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5797that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5798versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5799the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5800
5801There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5802first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5803source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5804script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5805maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5806@smallexample
5807__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5808@end smallexample
5809@noindent
5810in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5811be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5812The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5813@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5814takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5815
5816The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5817function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5818an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5819version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5820linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5821
5822To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5823source file. Here is an example:
5824
5825@smallexample
5826__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5827__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5828__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5829__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5830@end smallexample
5831
5832In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5833unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5834example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5835@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5836
5837When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5838some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5839this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5840@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5841declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5842you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5843
5844If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5845within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5846(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5847specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5848
cb840a31
L
5849You can also specify the language in the version script:
5850
5851@smallexample
5852VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5853@end smallexample
5854
c0065db7 5855The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5856The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5857demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5858patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5859@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5860
86043bbb
MM
5861Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5862described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5863or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5864the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5865whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5866cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5867might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5868should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5869expect when you upgrade.
5870
252b5132
RH
5871@node Expressions
5872@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5873@cindex expressions
5874@cindex arithmetic
5875The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5876that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5877expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5878host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5879
5880You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5881
5882The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5883expressions.
5884
5885@menu
5886* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5887* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5888* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5889* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5890* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5891* Operators:: Operators
5892* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5893* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5894* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5895@end menu
5896
5897@node Constants
5898@subsection Constants
5899@cindex integer notation
5900@cindex constants in linker scripts
5901All constants are integers.
5902
5903As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5904octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5905hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5906@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5907@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5908value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5909
5910@cindex scaled integers
5911@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5912@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5913@cindex suffixes for integers
5914@cindex integer suffixes
5915In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5916constant by
5917@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5918@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5919@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5920@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5921@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5922@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5923@tex
5924${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5925@end tex
5926@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5927respectively. For example, the following
5928all refer to the same quantity:
5929
252b5132 5930@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5931_fourk_1 = 4K;
5932_fourk_2 = 4096;
5933_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5934_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5935@end smallexample
5936
8a308ae8
NC
5937Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5938conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5939
0c71d759
NC
5940@node Symbolic Constants
5941@subsection Symbolic Constants
5942@cindex symbolic constants
5943@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5944It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5945the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5946
5947@table @code
5948@item MAXPAGESIZE
5949@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5950The target's maximum page size.
5951
5952@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5953@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5954The target's default page size.
5955@end table
5956
5957So for example:
5958
5959@smallexample
9d5777a3 5960 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5961@end smallexample
5962
5963will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5964supported by the target.
5965
252b5132
RH
5966@node Symbols
5967@subsection Symbol Names
5968@cindex symbol names
5969@cindex names
5970@cindex quoted symbol names
5971@kindex "
5972Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5973and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5974Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5975specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5976keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5977@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5978"SECTION" = 9;
5979"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5980@end smallexample
5981
5982Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5983to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5984whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5985
ecca9871
L
5986@node Orphan Sections
5987@subsection Orphan Sections
5988@cindex orphan
5989Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5990are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5991script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5992output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5993in which to place the orphaned input section.
5994
5995If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5996an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5997placed at the end of that output section.
5998
5999If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
6000sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
6001name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
6002orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
6003one new output section.
6004
6005If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
6006then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
6007in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
6008linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
6009attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
6010sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6011support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 6012
a05a5b64
TP
6013The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6014(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
6015output sections an orphan is placed in.
6016
252b5132
RH
6017@node Location Counter
6018@subsection The Location Counter
6019@kindex .
6020@cindex dot
6021@cindex location counter
6022@cindex current output location
6023The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6024current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6025location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6026within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6027anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6028
6029@cindex holes
6030Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6031moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6032location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6033and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6034doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6035
6036@smallexample
6037SECTIONS
6038@{
6039 output :
6040 @{
6041 file1(.text)
6042 . = . + 1000;
6043 file2(.text)
6044 . += 1000;
6045 file3(.text)
563e308f 6046 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6047@}
6048@end smallexample
6049@noindent
6050In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6051located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6052followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6053@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6054@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6055specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6056
5c6bbab8
NC
6057@cindex dot inside sections
6058Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6059current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6060statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6061absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6062however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6063not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6064
6065@smallexample
6066SECTIONS
6067@{
6068 . = 0x100
6069 .text: @{
6070 *(.text)
6071 . = 0x200
6072 @}
6073 . = 0x500
6074 .data: @{
6075 *(.data)
6076 . += 0x600
6077 @}
6078@}
6079@end smallexample
6080
6081The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6082and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6083the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6084much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6085move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6086and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6087the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6088the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6089
b5666f2f
AM
6090@cindex dot outside sections
6091Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6092output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6093needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6094
6095@smallexample
6096SECTIONS
6097@{
6098 start_of_text = . ;
6099 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6100 end_of_text = . ;
6101
6102 start_of_data = . ;
6103 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6104 end_of_data = . ;
6105@}
6106@end smallexample
6107
6108If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6109not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6110between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6111should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6112blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6113the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6114sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6115statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6116special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6117place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6118as follows:
6119
6120@smallexample
6121SECTIONS
6122@{
6123 start_of_text = . ;
6124 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6125 end_of_text = . ;
6126
6127 start_of_data = . ;
6128 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6129 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6130 end_of_data = . ;
6131@}
6132@end smallexample
6133
6134This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6135@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6136placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6137assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6138a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6139section. So you could write:
6140
6141@smallexample
6142SECTIONS
6143@{
6144 start_of_text = . ;
6145 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6146 end_of_text = . ;
6147
6148 . = . ;
6149 start_of_data = . ;
6150 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6151 end_of_data = . ;
6152@}
6153@end smallexample
6154
6155Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6156@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6157
252b5132
RH
6158@need 2000
6159@node Operators
6160@subsection Operators
6161@cindex operators for arithmetic
6162@cindex arithmetic operators
6163@cindex precedence in expressions
6164The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6165the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6166@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6167@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6168@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6169@smallexample
6170precedence associativity Operators Notes
6171(highest)
61721 left ! - ~ (1)
61732 left * / %
61743 left + -
61754 left >> <<
61765 left == != > < <= >=
61776 left &
61787 left |
61798 left &&
61809 left ||
618110 right ? :
618211 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6183(lowest)
6184@end smallexample
6185Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6186(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6187(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6188@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6189@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6190@tex
6191\vskip \baselineskip
6192%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6193\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6194\hrule
6195\halign
6196{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6197height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6198&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6199height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6200\noalign{\hrule}
6201height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6202&highest&&&&&\cr
6203% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6204&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6205&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6206&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6207&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6208&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6209&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6210&7&&left&&|&\cr
6211&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6212&9&&left&&||&\cr
6213&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6214&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6215&lowest&&&&&\cr
6216height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6217\hrule}
6218@end tex
6219@iftex
6220{
6221@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6222@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6223@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6224}
6225@end iftex
6226@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6227
6228@node Evaluation
6229@subsection Evaluation
6230@cindex lazy evaluation
6231@cindex expression evaluation order
6232The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6233an expression when absolutely necessary.
6234
6235The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6236address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6237regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6238as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6239
6240However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6241until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6242other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6243for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6244
6245The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6246assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6247allocation.
6248
6249Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6250@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6251
6252If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6253available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6254following
6255@smallexample
6256@group
6257SECTIONS
6258 @{
a1ab1d2a 6259 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6260 @{ *(.text) @}
6261 @}
6262@end group
6263@end smallexample
6264@noindent
6265will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6266address}.
6267
6268@node Expression Section
6269@subsection The Section of an Expression
6270@cindex expression sections
6271@cindex absolute expressions
6272@cindex relative expressions
6273@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6274@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6275@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6276Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6277relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6278using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6279value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6280symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6281operations.
6282
abf4be64
AM
6283Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6284section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6285address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6286@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6287functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6288One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6289(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6290differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6291versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6292section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6293Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6294absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6295given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6296everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6297
6298In the following simple example,
252b5132 6299
7542af2a
AM
6300@smallexample
6301@group
6302SECTIONS
6303 @{
6304 . = 0x100;
6305 __executable_start = 0x100;
6306 .data :
6307 @{
6308 . = 0x10;
6309 __data_start = 0x10;
6310 *(.data)
6311 @}
6312 @dots{}
6313 @}
6314@end group
6315@end smallexample
252b5132 6316
7542af2a
AM
6317both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6318address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6319@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6320section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6321
5c3049d2
AM
6322For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6323addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6324
6325@itemize @bullet
6326@item
c05f749e
AM
6327Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6328operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6329absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6330@item
7542af2a
AM
6331Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6332relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6333and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6334@item
c05f749e
AM
6335Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6336in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6337address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6338before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6339@end itemize
6340
6341The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6342
6343@itemize @bullet
6344@item
6345An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6346@item
6347The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6348@item
9bc8bb33 6349The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6350relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6351(after above conversions) is also a number when
6352@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6353but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6354@item
6355The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6356relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6357section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6358@item
6359The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6360conversions) is an absolute address.
6361@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6362
6363You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6364to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6365create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6366section @samp{.data}:
6367@smallexample
6368SECTIONS
6369 @{
6370 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6371 @}
6372@end smallexample
6373@noindent
6374If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6375@samp{.data} section.
6376
7542af2a
AM
6377Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6378particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6379
252b5132
RH
6380@node Builtin Functions
6381@subsection Builtin Functions
6382@cindex functions in expressions
6383The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6384use in linker script expressions.
6385
6386@table @code
6387@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6388@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6389@cindex expression, absolute
6390Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6391of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6392value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6393normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6394
6395@item ADDR(@var{section})
6396@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6397@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6398Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6399script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6400the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6401@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6402@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6403the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6404@smallexample
6405@group
6406SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6407 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6408 @{
252b5132
RH
6409 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6410 @dots{}
6411 @}
6412 .output :
6413 @{
6414 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6415 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6416 @}
6417@dots{} @}
6418@end group
6419@end smallexample
6420
876f4090
NS
6421@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6422@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6423@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6424@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6425@cindex round up location counter
6426@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6427@cindex round up expression
6428@cindex align expression
6429Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6430to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6431doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6432arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6433expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6434equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6435
6436Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6437next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6438variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6439input sections:
252b5132
RH
6440@smallexample
6441@group
6442SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6443 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6444 *(.data)
6445 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6446 @}
6447@dots{} @}
6448@end group
6449@end smallexample
6450@noindent
6451The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6452a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6453a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6454of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6455
6456The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6457
362c1d1a
NS
6458@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6459@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6460@cindex section alignment
6461Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6462been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6463evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6464the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6465value in that section.
6466@smallexample
6467@group
6468SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6469 .output @{
6470 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6471 @dots{}
6472 @}
6473@dots{} @}
6474@end group
6475@end smallexample
6476
252b5132
RH
6477@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6478@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6479This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6480scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6481section.
6482
2d20f7bf
JJ
6483@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6484@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6485This is equivalent to either
6486@smallexample
6487(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6488@end smallexample
6489or
6490@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6491(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6492 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6493@end smallexample
6494@noindent
6495depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6496for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6497@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6498If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6499memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6500bytes in the on-disk file.
6501
6502This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6503any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6504@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6505be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6506running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6507that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6508page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6509
6510@noindent
6511Example:
6512@smallexample
6513 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6514@end smallexample
6515
6516@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6517@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6518This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6519evaluation purposes.
6520
6521@smallexample
6522 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6523@end smallexample
6524
a4f5ad88
JJ
6525@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6526@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6527This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6528@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6529When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6530does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6531@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6532argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6533script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6534@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6535padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6536section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6537
6538@smallexample
6539 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6540@end smallexample
6541
252b5132
RH
6542@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6543@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6544@cindex symbol defaults
6545Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6546defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6547return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6548default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6549shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6550the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6551existed, its value is preserved:
6552
6553@smallexample
6554@group
6555SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6556 .text : @{
6557 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6558 @dots{}
6559 @}
6560 @dots{}
6561@}
6562@end group
6563@end smallexample
6564
3ec57632
NC
6565@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6566@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6567Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6568
252b5132
RH
6569@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6570@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6571@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6572Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6573Section LMA}).
6574
2e53f7d6
NC
6575@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6576@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6577Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6578@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6579
252b5132
RH
6580@kindex MAX
6581@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6582Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6583
6584@kindex MIN
6585@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6586Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6587
6588@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6589@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6590@cindex unallocated address, next
6591Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6592This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6593use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6594output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6595
3ec57632
NC
6596@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6597@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6598Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6599
ba916c8a
MM
6600@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6601@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6602Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6603value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6604@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6605will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6606can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6607``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6608name.
6609
252b5132
RH
6610@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6611@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6612@cindex section size
6613Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6614been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6615evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6616@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6617@smallexample
6618@group
6619SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6620 .output @{
6621 .start = . ;
6622 @dots{}
6623 .end = . ;
6624 @}
6625 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6626 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6627@dots{} @}
6628@end group
6629@end smallexample
6630
6631@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6632@itemx sizeof_headers
6633@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6634@cindex header size
6635Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6636information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6637this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6638choose, to facilitate paging.
6639
6640@cindex not enough room for program headers
6641@cindex program headers, not enough room
6642When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6643@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6644number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6645addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6646additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6647room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6648the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6649script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6650you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6651command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6652@end table
6653
6654@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6655@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6656@cindex implicit linker scripts
6657If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6658an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6659linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6660linker will report an error.
6661
6662An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6663
6664Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6665assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6666commands.
6667
6668Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6669at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6670read. This can affect archive searching.
6671
6672@ifset GENERIC
6673@node Machine Dependent
6674@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6675
6676@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6677@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6678sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6679functionality are not listed.
6680
6681@menu
36f63dca
NC
6682@ifset H8300
6683* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6684@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6685@ifset M68HC11
6686* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6687@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6688@ifset ARM
6689* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6690@end ifset
6691@ifset HPPA
6692* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6693@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6694@ifset M68K
6695* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6696@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6697@ifset MIPS
6698* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6699@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6700@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6701* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6702@end ifset
2469cfa2 6703@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6704* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6705@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6706@ifset NDS32
6707* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6708@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6709@ifset NIOSII
6710* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6711@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6712@ifset POWERPC
6713* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6714@end ifset
6715@ifset POWERPC64
6716* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6717@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6718@ifset S/390
6719* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6720@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6721@ifset SPU
6722* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6723@end ifset
74459f0e 6724@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6725* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6726@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6727@ifset WIN32
6728* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6729@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6730@ifset XTENSA
6731* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6732@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6733@end menu
6734@end ifset
6735
252b5132
RH
6736@ifset H8300
6737@ifclear GENERIC
6738@raisesections
6739@end ifclear
6740
6741@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6742@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6743
6744@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6745For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6746you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6747
6748@table @emph
6749@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6750@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6751@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6752targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6753program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6754respectively.
6755
6756@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6757@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6758@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6759@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6760sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6761page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6762(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6763@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6764top page of memory).
1502569c 6765
81f5558e
NC
6766@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6767indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6768displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6769the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6770@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6771whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6772range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6773
1502569c 6774@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6775@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6776biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6777which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6778page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6779(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6780@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6781the top page of memory).
6782
6783@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6784@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
678532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6786changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6787(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6788@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6789the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6790@end table
6791
6792@ifclear GENERIC
6793@lowersections
6794@end ifclear
6795@end ifset
6796
36f63dca 6797@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6798@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6799@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6800@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6801@node Renesas
6802@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6803
c2dcd04e
NC
6804@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6805H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6806options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6807@end ifset
6808@end ifclear
6809
36f63dca
NC
6810@ifset ARM
6811@ifclear GENERIC
6812@raisesections
6813@end ifclear
6814
93fd0973
SC
6815@ifset M68HC11
6816@ifclear GENERIC
6817@raisesections
6818@end ifclear
6819
6820@node M68HC11/68HC12
6821@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6822
6823@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6824
6825@subsection Linker Relaxation
6826
6827For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6828optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6829
6830@table @emph
6831@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6832@item relaxing address modes
6833@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6834targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6835program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6836respectively.
6837
6838@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6839transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6840page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6841
6842@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6843When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6844of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6845addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6846@code{bset} instructions.
6847
6848@end table
6849
6850@subsection Trampoline Generation
6851
6852@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6853@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6854For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6855call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6856will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6857trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6858case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6859point to the function trampoline.
6860
6861@ifclear GENERIC
6862@lowersections
6863@end ifclear
6864@end ifset
6865
36f63dca 6866@node ARM
3674e28a 6867@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6868
6869@cindex ARM interworking support
6870@kindex --support-old-code
6871For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6872between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6873been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6874line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6875libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6876option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6877given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6878which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6879the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6880non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6881
6882@cindex thumb entry point
6883@cindex entry point, thumb
6884@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6885The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6886@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6887But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6888branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6889executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6890
ce11ba6c
KT
6891@cindex PE import table prefixing
6892@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6893The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6894the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6895element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6896import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6897
e489d0ae
PB
6898@cindex BE8
6899@kindex --be8
6900The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6901executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6902objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6903option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6904little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6905
3674e28a
PB
6906@cindex TARGET1
6907@kindex --target1-rel
6908@kindex --target1-abs
6909The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6910@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6911or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6912and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6913
6914@cindex TARGET2
6915@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6916The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6917@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6918meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6919@table @samp
6920@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6921@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6922@item abs
6923@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6924@item got-rel
6925@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6926@end table
6927
319850b4
JB
6928@cindex FIX_V4BX
6929@kindex --fix-v4bx
6930The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6931specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6932interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6933also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6934
6935In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6936linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6937@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6938
6939In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6940relocations are ignored.
6941
845b51d6
PB
6942@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6943@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6944Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6945relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6946
6947@smallexample
6948TST rM, #1
6949MOVEQ PC, rM
6950BX Rn
6951@end smallexample
6952
6953This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6954and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6955condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6956
33bfe774
JB
6957@cindex USE_BLX
6958@kindex --use-blx
6959The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6960BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6961situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6962code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6963each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6964
6965This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6966specify it if you are using that target.
6967
c6dd86c6
JB
6968@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6969@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6970The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6971bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6972instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6973to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6974the support code can read the intended values.
6975
6976The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6977intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6978and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6979intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6980full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6981you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6982
6983If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6984enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6985@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6986mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6987vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6988@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6989
6990If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6991potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6992such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6993first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6994instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6995the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6996are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6997
2de70689
MGD
6998@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6999@kindex --fix-arm1176
7000@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
7001The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
7002in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
7003are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
7004unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
7005
9d5777a3 7006Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 7007Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
7008http://infocenter.arm.com/.
7009
a504d23a
LA
7010@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7011@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7012
7013The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7014workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7015the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7016off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7017the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7018core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7019integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7020VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7021
7022The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7023necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7024
7025The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7026@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7027STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7028linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7029@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7030
7031If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7032potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7033such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7034replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7035branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7036then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7037
7038The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7039the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7040
7041The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7042they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7043there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7044occurs.
7045
7046The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7047PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7048large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7049cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7050occurs.
7051
bf21ed78
MS
7052@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7053@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7054The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7055warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7056enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7057linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7058using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7059not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7060
7061@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7062@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7063The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7064warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7065@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7066linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7067using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7068
726150b7
NC
7069@cindex PIC_VENEER
7070@kindex --pic-veneer
7071The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7072ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7073is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7074@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7075
7076@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7077@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7078The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7079code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7080perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7081placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7082controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7083The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7084duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7085group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7086code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7087where they should be placed.
7088
7089The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7090@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7091placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7092branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7093placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7094value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7095exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7096A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7097linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7098from the input sections.
7099
7100The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7101@samp{N = +1}.
7102
1a51c1a4
NC
7103Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7104only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7105otherwise.
7106
1db37fe6
YG
7107@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7108@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7109@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7110The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7111
7112The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7113
68fcca92
JW
7114@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7115@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7116@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7117The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7118
7119Please contact ARM for further details.
7120
1db37fe6
YG
7121@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7122@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7123@cindex Merging exidx entries
7124The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7125
7126@kindex --long-plt
7127@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7128The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7129which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7130entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7131
1f56df9d
JW
7132@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7133@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7134The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7135link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7136
4ba2ef8f
TP
7137@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7138All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7139Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7140@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7141veneers in memory.
7142
54ddd295
TP
7143@kindex --cmse-implib
7144@cindex Secure gateway import library
7145The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7146specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7147secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7148executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7149
0955507f
TP
7150@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7151@cindex Input import library
7152The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7153must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7154given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7155in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7156@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7157library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7158library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7159for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7160specified.
7161
36f63dca
NC
7162@ifclear GENERIC
7163@lowersections
7164@end ifclear
7165@end ifset
7166
7167@ifset HPPA
7168@ifclear GENERIC
7169@raisesections
7170@end ifclear
7171
7172@node HPPA ELF32
7173@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7174@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7175@kindex --multi-subspace
7176When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7177import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7178The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7179stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7180multiple sub-spaces.
7181
7182@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7183@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7184Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7185stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7186@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7187sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7188a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7189the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7190conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7191prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7192A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7193branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7194@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7195@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7196detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7197positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7198
7199Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7200single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7201create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7202large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7203
7204@ifclear GENERIC
7205@lowersections
7206@end ifclear
7207@end ifset
7208
7fb9f789
NC
7209@ifset M68K
7210@ifclear GENERIC
7211@raisesections
7212@end ifclear
7213
7214@node M68K
7215@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7216
7217@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7218@kindex --got=@var{type}
7219The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7220The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7221@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7222the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7223@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7224entries only at non-negative offsets.
7225@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7226entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7227support such GOTs.
7228@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7229output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7230file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7231files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7232
7233@ifclear GENERIC
7234@lowersections
7235@end ifclear
7236@end ifset
7237
833794fc
MR
7238@ifset MIPS
7239@ifclear GENERIC
7240@raisesections
7241@end ifclear
7242
7243@node MIPS
7244@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7245
7246@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7247@kindex --insn32
7248@kindex --no-insn32
7249The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7250microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7251in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7252used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7253or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7254including 16-bit ones where possible.
7255
8b10b0b3
MR
7256@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7257@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7258@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7259The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7260control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7261@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7262relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7263calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7264relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7265instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7266or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7267the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7268
833794fc
MR
7269@ifclear GENERIC
7270@lowersections
7271@end ifclear
7272@end ifset
7273
36f63dca
NC
7274@ifset MMIX
7275@ifclear GENERIC
7276@raisesections
7277@end ifclear
7278
7279@node MMIX
7280@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7281For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7282@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7283understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7284can translate between the two formats.
7285
7286There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7287Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7288registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7289equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7290@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7291global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7292this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7293symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7294
7a2de473
HPN
7295Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7296@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7297The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7298of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7299
7300Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7301are left out from an mmo file.
7302
7303@ifclear GENERIC
7304@lowersections
7305@end ifclear
7306@end ifset
7307
7308@ifset MSP430
7309@ifclear GENERIC
7310@raisesections
7311@end ifclear
7312
7313@node MSP430
7314@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7315For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7316will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7317just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7318
7319@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7320The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7321
7322@table @code
7323@item @samp{.vectors}
7324Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7325
7326@item @samp{.bootloader}
7327Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7328in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7329
7330@item @samp{.infomem}
7331Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7332this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7333
c0065db7 7334@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7335This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7336in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7337
7338@item @samp{.noinit}
7339Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7340
c0065db7 7341The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7342@end table
7343
7ef3addb
JL
7344@table @option
7345@cindex MSP430 Options
7346@kindex --code-region
7347@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7348This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7349argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7350using this option.
7351
7352@kindex --data-region
7353@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7354This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7355[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7356for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7357
7358@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7359@item --disable-sec-transformation
7360Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7361and @code{--data-region} options.
7362This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7363wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7364not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7365@end table
7366
36f63dca
NC
7367@ifclear GENERIC
7368@lowersections
7369@end ifclear
7370@end ifset
7371
35c08157
KLC
7372@ifset NDS32
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@raisesections
7375@end ifclear
7376
7377@node NDS32
7378@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7379@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7380For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7381relaxes objects according to these options.
7382
7383@table @code
7384@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7385Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7386
7387@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7388Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7389
7390@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7391Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7392
7393@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7394Export the EX9 table after linking.
7395
7396@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7397Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7398
7399@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7400Update the existing EX9 table.
7401
7402@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7403Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7404
7405@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7406Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7407
7408@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7409Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7410
7411@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7412Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7413@end table
7414
7415@ifclear GENERIC
7416@lowersections
7417@end ifclear
7418@end ifset
7419
78058a5e
SL
7420@ifset NIOSII
7421@ifclear GENERIC
7422@raisesections
7423@end ifclear
7424
7425@node Nios II
7426@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7427@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7428@kindex --relax on Nios II
7429
7430Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7431transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7432which may result in @command{ld} giving
7433@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7434The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7435trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7436outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7437trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7438be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7439larger than 256MB.
7440
7441The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7442is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7443@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7444locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7445source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7446register as a temporary.
7447
7448Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7449relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7450option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7451
7452@ifclear GENERIC
7453@lowersections
7454@end ifclear
7455@end ifset
7456
2a60a7a8
AM
7457@ifset POWERPC
7458@ifclear GENERIC
7459@raisesections
7460@end ifclear
7461
7462@node PowerPC ELF32
7463@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7464@cindex PowerPC long branches
7465@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7466Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7467displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7468@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7469@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7470the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7471section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7472section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7473@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7474both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7475considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7476
7477@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7478@table @option
7479@cindex PowerPC PLT
7480@kindex --bss-plt
7481@item --bss-plt
7482Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7483generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7484the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7485writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7486@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7487PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7488compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7489BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7490
016687f8
AM
7491@kindex --secure-plt
7492@item --secure-plt
7493@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7494@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7495when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7496layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7497style BSS PLT.
7498
2a60a7a8
AM
7499@cindex PowerPC GOT
7500@kindex --sdata-got
7501@item --sdata-got
7502The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7503sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7504@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7505section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7506@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7507@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7508@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7509@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7510PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7511pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7512GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7513really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7514
7515@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7516@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7517@item --emit-stub-syms
7518This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7519symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7520
7521@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7522@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7523@item --no-tls-optimize
7524PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7525sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7526disable the optimization.
7527@end table
7528
7529@ifclear GENERIC
7530@lowersections
7531@end ifclear
7532@end ifset
7533
7534@ifset POWERPC64
7535@ifclear GENERIC
7536@raisesections
7537@end ifclear
7538
7539@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7540@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7541
7542@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7543@table @option
7544@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7545@kindex --stub-group-size
7546@item --stub-group-size
7547Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7548by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7549@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7550sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7551a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7552the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7553conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7554prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7555A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7556branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7557@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7558@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7559detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7560positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7561
7562Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7563single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7564create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7565large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7566
7567@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7568@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7569@item --emit-stub-syms
7570This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7571symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7572
7573@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7574@kindex --dotsyms
7575@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7576@item --dotsyms
7577@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7578These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7579in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7580function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7581code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7582properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7583to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7584@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7585dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7586feature.
7587
7ae4ea7d
AM
7588@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7589@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7590@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7591@item --save-restore-funcs
7592@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7593These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7594provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7595@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7596function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7597link.
7598
2a60a7a8
AM
7599@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7600@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7601@item --no-tls-optimize
7602PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7603sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7604disable the optimization.
7605
7c9cf415
AM
7606@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7607@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7608@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa
AM
7609@kindex --tls-get-addr-regsave
7610@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-regsave
95421fb9
AM
7611@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7612@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
9e7028aa 7613These options control how PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7c9cf415
AM
7614stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7615an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7616@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
9e7028aa
AM
7617stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
7618generation of the stub when glibc advertises the availability of
7619__tls_get_addr_opt.
7620Using @option{--tls-get-addr-optimize} with an older glibc won't do
7621much besides slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking
7622an application against an older glibc with the expectation that it
7623will normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7624@option{--tls-get-addr-regsave} forces generation of a stub that saves
7625and restores volatile registers around the call into glibc. Normally,
7626this is done when the linker detects a call to __tls_get_addr_desc.
7627Such calls then go via the register saving stub to __tls_get_addr_opt.
5cebc931 7628@option{--no-tls-get-addr-regsave} disables generation of the
9e7028aa 7629register saves.
7c9cf415 7630
2a60a7a8
AM
7631@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7632@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7633@item --no-opd-optimize
7634PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7635corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7636the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7637Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7638
7639@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7640@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7641@item --non-overlapping-opd
7642Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7643@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7644the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7645entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7646
7647@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7648@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7649@item --no-toc-optimize
7650PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7651entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7652reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7653marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7654marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7655relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7656unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7657reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7658discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7659reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7660code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7661optimization.
7662
7663@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7664@kindex --no-multi-toc
7665@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7666If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7667@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7668where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7669entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7670total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7671grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7672TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7673calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7674help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
767564K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7676Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7677
7678@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7679@kindex --no-toc-sort
7680@item --no-toc-sort
7681By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7682happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7683placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7684with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7685referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7686@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7687results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7688off this feature.
7689
7690@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7691@kindex --plt-align
7692@kindex --no-plt-align
7693@item --plt-align
7694@itemx --no-plt-align
7695Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7696aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7697boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7698specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7699specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7700if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7701PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7702
7703@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7704@kindex --plt-static-chain
7705@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7706@item --plt-static-chain
7707@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7708Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7709chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7710chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7711
7712@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7713@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7714@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7715@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7716@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7717With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7718lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7719another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7720order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7721memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7722barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7723looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7724seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7725default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7726
7727@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7728@kindex --plt-localentry
7729@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7730@item --plt-localentry
7731@itemx --no-localentry
7732ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7733ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7734(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7735Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7736or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7737functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7738in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7739interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7740including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7741to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7742complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7743care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7744@end table
7745
7746@ifclear GENERIC
7747@lowersections
7748@end ifclear
7749@end ifset
7750
b4cbbe8f
AK
7751@ifset S/390
7752@ifclear GENERIC
7753@raisesections
7754@end ifclear
7755
7756@node S/390 ELF
7757@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7758
7759@cindex S/390 ELF options
7760@table @option
7761
7762@cindex S/390
7763@kindex --s390-pgste
7764@item --s390-pgste
7765This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7766segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7767binaries marked that way.
7768@end table
7769
7770@ifclear GENERIC
7771@lowersections
7772@end ifclear
7773@end ifset
7774
49fa1e15
AM
7775@ifset SPU
7776@ifclear GENERIC
7777@raisesections
7778@end ifclear
7779
7780@node SPU ELF
7781@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7782
7783@cindex SPU ELF options
7784@table @option
7785
7786@cindex SPU plugins
7787@kindex --plugin
7788@item --plugin
7789This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7790
7791@cindex SPU overlays
7792@kindex --no-overlays
7793@item --no-overlays
7794Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7795regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7796@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7797turns off all this special overlay handling.
7798
7799@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7800@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7801@item --emit-stub-syms
7802This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7803symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7804
7805@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7806@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7807@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7808This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7809function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7810on calls to non-overlay regions.
7811
7812@cindex SPU local store size
7813@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7814@item --local-store=lo:hi
7815@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7816the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7817range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7818
c0065db7 7819@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7820@kindex --stack-analysis
7821@item --stack-analysis
7822SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7823unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7824under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7825@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7826@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7827determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7828for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7829for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7830for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7831find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7832and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7833under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7834dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7835is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7836and calls will be given.
7837
c0065db7 7838@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7839@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7840@item --emit-stack-syms
7841This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7842in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7843These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7844functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7845functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7846such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7847The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7848@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7849@end table
7850
7851@ifclear GENERIC
7852@lowersections
7853@end ifclear
7854@end ifset
7855
36f63dca
NC
7856@ifset TICOFF
7857@ifclear GENERIC
7858@raisesections
7859@end ifclear
7860
7861@node TI COFF
7862@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7863@cindex TI COFF versions
7864@kindex --format=@var{version}
7865The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7866TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7867also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7868format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7869header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7870
7871@ifclear GENERIC
7872@lowersections
7873@end ifclear
7874@end ifset
7875
2ca22b03
NC
7876@ifset WIN32
7877@ifclear GENERIC
7878@raisesections
7879@end ifclear
7880
7881@node WIN32
7882@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7883
c0065db7 7884This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7885See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7886command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7887
7888@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7889@cindex import libraries
7890@item import libraries
69da35b5 7891The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7892libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7893regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7894archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7895support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7896@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7897
c0065db7
RM
7898@item exporting DLL symbols
7899@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7900The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7901
7902@table @emph
7903@item using auto-export functionality
7904@cindex using auto-export functionality
7905By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7906which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7907
0a5d968e
NC
7908@itemize
7909@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7910@item --exclude-symbols
7911@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7912@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7913@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7914@end itemize
7915
09e2aba4
DK
7916When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7917(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7918symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7919often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7920private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7921options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7922exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7923final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7924
7925If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7926command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7927if either of the following are true:
7928
7929@itemize
7930@item A DEF file is used.
7931@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7932@end itemize
dc8465bf 7933
c0065db7
RM
7934@item using a DEF file
7935@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7936Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7937an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7938exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7939name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7940command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7941
7942@example
7943gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7944@end example
7945
0a5d968e
NC
7946Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7947@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7948
dc8465bf
NC
7949Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7950
7951@example
4b5bd4e7 7952LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7953
7954EXPORTS
7955foo
7956bar
7957_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7958another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7959var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7960doo = foo == foo2
7961eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7962@end example
dc8465bf 7963
7fcab871 7964This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7965symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7966alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7967by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7968@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7969@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7970export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7971in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7972symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7973
6b31ad16
DS
7974The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7975name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7976the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7977
b45619c0
NC
7978When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7979library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7980@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7981executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7982
7983With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7984specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7985non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7986
7987If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7988or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7989filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7990
4b5bd4e7
DS
7991The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7992
7993@example
7994EXPORTS
7995 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7996 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7997 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7998@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7999
8000Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
8001@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
8002@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
8003@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
8004Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
8005@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
8006string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
8007
8008The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
8009
8010@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
8011will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
8012by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
8013linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
8014library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
8015
8016@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
8017The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
8018the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
8019@code{*_imp__foo}).
8020
8021@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8022well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8023read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8024variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8025the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8026extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8027application will behave unexpectedly.
8028
8029@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8030it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8031symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 8032API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 8033the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 8034
4b5bd4e7
DS
8035See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8036other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8037
8038@cindex creating a DEF file
8039While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8040with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8041
8042@item Using decorations
8043@cindex Using decorations
8044Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8045itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8046declared as:
8047
8048@example
8049__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8050__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8051@end example
8052
8053All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8054any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8055this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8056the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8057
8058Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8059decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8060instead:
8061
8062@example
8063__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8064__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8065@end example
8066
c0065db7
RM
8067This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8068when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8069variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8070code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8071of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8072omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8073@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8074information.
c0065db7 8075@end table
dc8465bf 8076
2ca22b03
NC
8077@cindex automatic data imports
8078@item automatic data imports
8079The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8080by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8081compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8082issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8083code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8084c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8085initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8086decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8087platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8088command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8089The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8090suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8091trigger the feature's use.
8092
c0065db7 8093auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8094additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8095
c0065db7 8096"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8097documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8098
c0065db7
RM
8099The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8100occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8101One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8102below.
8103
8104@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8105For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8106object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8107offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8108field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8109in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8110without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8111The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8112references.
8113
c0065db7
RM
8114The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8115be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8116themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8117runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8118compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8119support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8120run without error on an older system.
8121
c0065db7
RM
8122@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8123enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8124
8125@cindex direct linking to a dll
8126@item direct linking to a dll
8127The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8128including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8129libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8130traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8131libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8132function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8133though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8134storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8135tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8136large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8137
c0065db7 8138Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8139@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8140of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8141perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8142select the dll instead of an import library.
8143
2ca22b03 8144
69da35b5
NC
8145For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8146to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8147
8148@example
45e948fe
NC
8149libxxx.dll.a
8150xxx.dll.a
8151libxxx.a
8152xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8153libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8154cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8155libxxx.dll
8156xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8157@end example
8158
69da35b5
NC
8159before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8160
c0065db7
RM
8161(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8162where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8163@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8164file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8165@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8166
c0065db7
RM
8167Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8168@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8169was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8170various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8171could coexist on the same machine.
8172
2ca22b03
NC
8173The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8174applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8175libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8176
8177@example
8178bin/
8179 cygxxx.dll
8180lib/
8181 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8182 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8183@end example
8184
c0065db7
RM
8185Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8186done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8187
81881. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8189@example
8190gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8191@end example
2ca22b03 8192
69da35b5
NC
8193However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8194(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8195@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8196not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8197
2ca22b03
NC
81982. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8199directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8200should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8201making the app/dll.
8202
8203@example
8204ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8205@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8206
8207Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8208
8209@example
8210gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8211@end example
69da35b5
NC
8212
8213This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8214perfectly legal
8215
8216@example
8217bin/
8218 cygxxx-5.dll
8219lib/
c0065db7 8220 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8221@end example
8222
dc8465bf 8223Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8224even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8225@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8226
8227Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8228wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8229
82301. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8231work with auto-imported data.
8232
dc8465bf
NC
82332. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8234import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8235symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8236for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8237possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8238
45e948fe
NC
82393. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8240critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8241in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8242stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8243
69da35b5 8244So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8245true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8246a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8247binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8248massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8249requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8250will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8251
c0065db7 8252@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8253@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8254@item adding additional names
8255Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8256A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8257exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8258when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8259import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8260
c0065db7 8261@example
dc8465bf
NC
8262LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8263
8264EXPORTS
c0065db7 8265foo
dc8465bf 8266_foo = foo
c0065db7 8267@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8268
8269The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8270
8271Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8272source code using the "weak" attribute:
8273
c0065db7
RM
8274@example
8275void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8276void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8277@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8278
8279See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8280symbols.
8281
8282@item renaming symbols
8283Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8284kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8285@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8286DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8287created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8288
c0065db7 8289@example
dc8465bf
NC
8290LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8291
8292EXPORTS
8293_foo = foo
c0065db7 8294@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8295
8296The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8297@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8298@end table
dc8465bf 8299
0a5d968e 8300Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8301unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8302If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8303@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8304that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8305@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8306renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8307to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8308the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8309In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8310which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8311
8312@cindex weak externals
8313@item weak externals
8314The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8315weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8316defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8317are three variants of weak externals:
8318@itemize
8319@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8320called lazy externals.
8321@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8322This form is not presently implemented.
8323@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8324implemented.
8325@end itemize
8326As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8327are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8328uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8329
8330@cindex aligned common symbols
8331@item aligned common symbols
8332As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8333desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8334the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8335carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8336by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8337tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8338but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8339warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8340
2ca22b03
NC
8341@end table
8342
8343@ifclear GENERIC
8344@lowersections
8345@end ifclear
8346@end ifset
8347
e0001a05
NC
8348@ifset XTENSA
8349@ifclear GENERIC
8350@raisesections
8351@end ifclear
8352
8353@node Xtensa
8354@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8355
8356@cindex Xtensa processors
8357The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8358@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8359specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8360keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8361example, with the command:
8362
8363@smallexample
8364SECTIONS
8365@{
8366 .text : @{
8367 *(.literal .text)
8368 @}
8369@}
8370@end smallexample
8371
8372@noindent
8373@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8374and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8375literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8376interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8377group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8378files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8379and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8380
43cd72b9 8381@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8382@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8383Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8384provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8385is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8386literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8387will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8388location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8389the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8390unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8391@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8392range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8393
8394For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8395to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8396instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8397instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8398instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8399@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8400hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8401By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8402switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8403density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8404instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8405performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8406linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8407a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8408
8409The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8410control the linker:
8411
8412@cindex Xtensa options
8413@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8414@item --size-opt
8415When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8416more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8417no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8418alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8419preserve the correctness of the code.
8420@end table
e0001a05
NC
8421
8422@ifclear GENERIC
8423@lowersections
8424@end ifclear
8425@end ifset
8426
252b5132
RH
8427@ifclear SingleFormat
8428@node BFD
8429@chapter BFD
8430
8431@cindex back end
8432@cindex object file management
8433@cindex object formats available
8434@kindex objdump -i
8435The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8436These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8437object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8438format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8439it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8440associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8441object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8442(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8443list all the formats available for your configuration.
8444
8445@cindex BFD requirements
8446@cindex requirements for BFD
8447As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8448several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8449BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8450formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8451been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8452BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8453may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8454
8455One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8456mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8457useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8458conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8459
8460@menu
8461* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8462@end menu
8463
8464@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8465@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8466@cindex opening object files
8467@include bfdsumm.texi
8468@end ifclear
8469
8470@node Reporting Bugs
8471@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8472@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8473@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8474
ff5dcc92 8475Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8476
8477Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8478it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8479to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8480work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8481@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8482
8483In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8484information that enables us to fix the bug.
8485
8486@menu
8487* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8488* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8489@end menu
8490
8491@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8492@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8493@cindex bug criteria
8494
8495If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8496
8497@itemize @bullet
8498@cindex fatal signal
8499@cindex linker crash
8500@cindex crash of linker
8501@item
8502If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8503@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8504
8505@cindex error on valid input
8506@item
ff5dcc92 8507If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8508
8509@cindex invalid input
8510@item
ff5dcc92 8511If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8512may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8513object files are correct.
8514
8515@item
8516If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8517improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8518@end itemize
8519
8520@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8521@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8522@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8523@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8524
8525A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8526products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8527recommend you contact that organization first.
8528
8529You can find contact information for many support companies and
8530individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8531distribution.
8532
ad22bfe8 8533@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8534Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8535@value{BUGURL}.
8536@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8537
8538The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8539@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8540fact or leave it out, state it!
8541
8542Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8543problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8544assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8545matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8546the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8547location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8548were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8549into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8550specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8551and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8552
8553Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8554the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8555on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8556
8557Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8558bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8559respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8560You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8561
8562To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8563
8564@itemize @bullet
8565@item
ff5dcc92 8566The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8567the @samp{--version} argument.
8568
8569Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8570the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8571
8572@item
ff5dcc92 8573Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8574patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8575
8576@item
8577The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8578version number.
8579
8580@item
ff5dcc92 8581What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8582``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8583
8584@item
8585The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8586observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8587list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8588sufficient.
8589
8590If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8591and then we might not encounter the bug.
8592
8593@item
8594A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8595bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8596provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8597bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8598state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8599requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8600we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8601attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8602
8603If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8604@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8605object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8606@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8607how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8608
8609@item
8610A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8611incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8612
ff5dcc92 8613Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8614will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8615not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8616a chance to make a mistake.
8617
8618Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8619say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8620copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8621C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8622and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8623fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8624you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8625any conclusion from our observations.
8626
8627@item
ff5dcc92 8628If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8629diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8630@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8631If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8632context, not by line number.
8633
8634The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8635sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8636@end itemize
8637
8638Here are some things that are not necessary:
8639
8640@itemize @bullet
8641@item
8642A description of the envelope of the bug.
8643
8644Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8645which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8646changes will not affect it.
8647
8648This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8649will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8650with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8651We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8652
8653Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8654of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8655output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8656less time, and so on.
8657
8658However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8659report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8660
8661@item
8662A patch for the bug.
8663
8664A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8665the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8666a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8667to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8668
ff5dcc92 8669Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8670construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8671through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8672able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8673fixed.
8674
8675And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8676patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8677help us to understand.
8678
8679@item
8680A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8681
8682Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8683things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8684@end itemize
8685
8686@node MRI
8687@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8688@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8689To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8690linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8691alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8692described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8693simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8694@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8695linker commands; these commands are described here.
8696
8697In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8698file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8699features to make use of them.
8700
8701You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8702@samp{-c} command-line option.
8703
8704Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8705command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8706blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8707MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8708issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8709
8710Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8711
8712You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8713lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8714The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8715
8716@table @code
8717@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8718@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8719@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8720Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8721the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8722@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8723your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8724script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8725commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8726input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8727@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8728
8729@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8730@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8731Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8732in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8733
8734@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8735
8736@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8737@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8738Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8739@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8740
8741@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8742@item BASE @var{expression}
8743Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8744absolute addresses) in the output file.
8745
8746@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8747@item CHIP @var{expression}
8748@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8749This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8750
8751@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8752@item END
8753This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8754
8755@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8756@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8757Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8758language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8759
8760@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8761@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8762Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8763@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8764
8765The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8766same line, with no change in its effect.
8767
8768@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8769@item LOAD @var{filename}
8770@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8771Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8772same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8773command line.
8774
8775@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8776@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8777@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8778MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8779option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8780
8781@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8782@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8783@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8784Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8785order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8786script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8787sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8788file, in the order specified.
8789
8790@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8791@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8792@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8793@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8794Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8795@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8796
8797@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8798@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8799@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8800@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8801You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8802specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8803If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8804@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8805@end table
8806
793c5807
NC
8807@node GNU Free Documentation License
8808@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8809@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8810
370b66a1
CD
8811@node LD Index
8812@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8813
8814@printindex cp
8815
8816@tex
7ca01ed9 8817% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8818% meantime:
8819\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8820\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8821\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8822\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8823\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8824\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8825\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8826\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8827\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8828% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8829@end tex
8830
252b5132 8831@bye
This page took 1.828139 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.